sap jam administrator guide

228
SAP Jam Administrator Guide Document Version: November 2015 Release – 2015-11-05 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Upload: tamas-koban

Post on 09-Mar-2016

140 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

DESCRIPTION

JamSAP Jam is an enterprise social networking solution that allows you to bring your employees, partners, and customers together with the documents and application data necessary to enable effective, collaborative problem solving and decision making. These activities are organized in a structured form that provides intuitive access to content and discussions, while encouraging the pursuit of business-critical objectives, and while following established processes through SAP Jam "work patterns".

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 1/228

SAP Jam Administrator GuideDocument Version: November 2015 Release – 2015-11-05

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Page 2: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 2/228

Content

1 Get started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1.1 About SAP Jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1.2 SAP Jam security and compliance FAQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1.3 SAP Jam integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

1.4 SAP Jam administrators and the Admin console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

1.5 View your SAP Jam service General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1.6 Initial administrator tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

1.7 Single sign-on and deep linking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.1 Configure SAP Jam Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Microsoft® Lync® integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.2 Customize your Homepage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.3 Configure SAP Jam Branding and Support options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.4 Configure Content Administration options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2.5 Configure Email Templates options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

2.6 Configure the Getting Started Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

2.7 Configure a Custom Terms of Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

2.8 Configure an Extranet Terms of Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

2.9 Configure Kudos options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

2.10 Configure Security options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

2.11 Configure Compliance monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

3 Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

3.1 Send Invites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

3.2 Users administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

About SAP Jam user types permissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

User privileges administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Create and manage member lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

About notification emails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

3.3 Configure the SAP Jam Mobile app. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

3.4 Custom Profile administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

3.5 Group templates administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

3.6 Create an auto group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

3.7 Hashtags administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

3.8 Overview of extranet administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

3.9 Extranet Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

2 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Content

Page 3: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 3/228

3.10 Company administrator Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Activity Summary by Month or Week report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Company Settings Changes report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Company User Detail Report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Compliance report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Content Views Report by Week or Month details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Contribution Report by Object by Week or Month report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Engagement Report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Expertise Report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Group Activity Report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Group Member Activity Report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Group Template Activity Report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Kudos Detail report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

Mobile Activation Report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Terms of Service Compliance Report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Top Disk Usage per Group or per User report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

User Contribution Activity Report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

User Contribution by Week or Month report details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

User Page Views Report by Week or Month details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

4 Integrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

4.1 Integrations overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

4.2 Integrate business records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Develop a new or custom business records integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Integrate SAP CRM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Integrate SAP ECC (SD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Integrate SAP Cloud for Customer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Integrate SuccessFactors Learning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Configure a business record filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Configure a business record sort order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Configure access to business records in SAP Jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

4.3 Access and Authorization overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Add a Trusted Certificate Authority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Add an OAuth Client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Add SAML Trusted IDPs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Configure SAP Jam as a SAML Local Identity Provider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

4.4 Integrate document repositories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Integrate SharePoint 2010 or 2013. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Federate SAP Jam search results into SharePoint searches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Integrate Alfresco One 4.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Integrate SAP Extended ECM by OpenText. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Integrate Office 365 SharePoint Sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Content © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 3

Page 4: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 4/228

Integrate SAP Mobile Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Integrate Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Integrate Google Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

Troubleshoot CMIS Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Access document repositories in SAP Jam groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

Access Office 365 Online Sites in SAP Jam groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

4.5 Add an OpenSocial Gadget. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

4.6 Integrate SAP Jam with gamification vendors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

4.7 Add Extensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

4.8 Use the Widget Builders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Use the Feed Widget Builder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215

Use the Recommendations Widget Builder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Use the Share Widget Builder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

4.9 Use the SAP Jam API. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

5 Get support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

5.1 Request Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

4 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Content

Page 5: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 5/228

1 Get started

1.1 About SAP Jam

SAP Jam is an enterprise social networking solution that allows you to bring your employees, partners, and

customers together with the documents and application data necessary to enable effective, collaborative problem

solving and decision making. These activities are organized in a structured form that provides intuitive access to

content and discussions, while encouraging the pursuit of business-critical objectives, and while following

established processes through SAP Jam "work patterns".

SAP Jam provides features such as the ability to create wikis and blogs, discussions on ideas, questions, and

issues, and share images, videos, and documents—with document versioning—as well as providing tools to create

and assign tasks, schedule meetings and calendar events, run polls, chat, and view and discuss data from external

business-critical applications. These activities are organized within public or private groups that are internal to

your organization or external to include customers and partners, and which can be based on templates designed

to address specific issues, key business objectives, or services.

System Requirements

SAP Jam is a cloud-based offering that requires a connection to the Internet and a supported web browser.

Working with SAP Jam requires the following:

● You must use one of the following supported web browsers:

○ Internet Explorer - versions 8 to 11 (IE 8 support will be dropped in Februrary, 2016)

○ FireFox - any version

○ Safari - versions 5, 6, or 7

○ Chrome - any version prior to v.42; v.42 and later are not supported

● You must have the following browser configurations set:

○ SAP Jam is a Web 2.0 application that uses caching heavily for static content. We recommend that you do

not clear your organization's web proxy cache as this will significantly impact performance. The minimum

recommended cache size is 250 MB. Newer web pages must be enabled.

○ HTTP 1.1 and JavaScript must be enabled.

○ Browser session cookies (non-persistent) must be enabled for authentication purposes.

○ The browser must allow pop-up windows from SAP Jam domains.

● The Adobe Flash plug-in is required. Currently, SAP Jam supports Adobe Flash Player 10.0 or higher.

● The Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.7 or higher is required for recording audio and video; JRE 1.7.0_6 or

higher is required to use the learning management system (LMS) offline player.

● Network bandwidth speeds of 300-400 Kbit/s are required.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 5

Page 6: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 6/228

Note

There are additional requirements for the learning management system package (LMS), for the virtual learning

classroom, and for the SuccessFactors HCM suite. Please check with your SAP Jam representative to ensureyour users' equipment meets these requirements if you purchase either of these packages.

SAP Jam editions

Depending on your edition of SAP Jam, different features are available. The document that describes all features

available in SAP Jam, regardless of the edition in which the features are contained, can be found at:

http://www.sap.com/corporate-en/about/our-company/policies/cloud/service-specifications.html .

1.2 SAP Jam security and compliance FAQ

Can documents opened in SAP Jam be stored locally and then be accessed after a user's access has been

revoked?

The behavior for this varies by platform:

● For SAP Jam mobile on Android, iOS, and Blackberry, there is no local caching. However, it is possible to

download and open documents that a given user has access to on the device, and this data could potentially

be stored in a non-encrypted way. For example, a user could open a PowerPoint document and save it to an

iOS device via Apple Keynote to modify the document.

● For the SAP Jam web application, whether accessed from a mobile device or from a laptop or desktop

standard web browser interface, document image previews are cached locally as images. Also, a document

can be downloaded from the web application and saved to disk if the user has permission to do so.

It is possible to set a specific document, or set of documents, inside SAP Jam to be "Read Only", which disallows

any download of the original source document, and only allows a user to view the image previews in the mobile

and web applications.

It is also possible to set device restrictions on both the mobile and desktop devices to disallow caching of any type

and to forbid downloads. This is achieved by leveraging the OEM OS provider's capabilities to restrict access to

the local disk, and is dependent on the local OS. For example, device policies could be loaded on an iOS-based

device to prevent local download of any content, or installation of unapproved applications such as Apple

Keynote.

Can a person who has left the company still access SAP Jam or any SAP Jam resources from his or her

personal device?

No, once access to SAP Jam is removed, the mobile or web application stops responding to the user's requests

immediately.

Is it possible to identify which device has performed a specific action in SAP Jam by IP address or by

International Mobile Station Equipment Identity (IMEI)?

6 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started

Page 7: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 7/228

Yes, but this information is currently restricted to SAP Customer Support administrators. Customers must open a

service request to gain access to the detailed logs.

In case of a legal prosecution, can we retrieve the contents posted by the concerned user or group? If so,

how and under what circumstances?

SAP Jam supports an in-product user interface for privileged company administrators to download all contents

from within a given group as a single .zip file. This includes all conversations, forum posts, comments, document

contents, etc., in a machine-readable format suitable for a legal hold.

Is there a connector or other access between SAP Jam and HP Autonomy Consolidated Archive (ACA)?

We have not evaluated HP ACA to determine if it supports SAP Jam; however, there is an SAP Jam API that

provides access to:

● Audit log information on all document uploads and downloads

● Usage reporting logs that provide information on how often a document has been used, if ever

● Usage reporting logs that provide information on when a document or set of documents was last updated

● The ability to download individual documents in their original format (PPT, Word, Excel)

● The ability to download all group content as .zip file

● The ability to delete any content inside SAP Jam

These capabilities could be leveraged in conjunction with archiving policies to fulfill company data retention

policies. Please see the SAP Jam Developer Guide on the SAP Help Portal, http://help.sap.com/sapjam for

documentation of the APIs.

Can the data deleted from the trash bin be reinstated by an experienced computer user?

SAP Jam has a built-in trash bin that helps to eliminate the possibility of inadvertently deleted content. Both users

and company administrators can retrieve items from the trash bin if a recovery is warranted. In the event that afile or piece of content is permanently removed from the trash bin, it cannot be recovered by anyone, including

very experienced computer users.

1.3 SAP Jam integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation

When SAP Jam instances are integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation, user access to SAP Jam is granted by

the company administrator through SuccessFactors Foundation administration settings using role-based

permissions (RBP). The default configuration for this integration provides all users configured with accessthrough SuccessFactors Foundation with access to SAP Jam. However, a company administrator can override

this default configuration and choose which roles, users, or groups of users get access to SAP Jam. Single sign-on

(SSO) is also available with this integration.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 7

Page 8: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 8/228

Requesting SAP Jam integration with SuccessFactors Foundation

Typically SAP Professional Services configures your SAP Jam instance integrated with SuccessFactorsFoundation during provisioning, but if this is not done, you can request the integration by creating a support ticket

in the Support Portal https://csauthfs.successfactors.com/adfs/ls/  with the following information:

● Request Summary: SAP Jam Integration Request [Customer Organization Name]

● Product: SAP Jam

● Category: Configuration Change Request

In the Request Details, make sure to include the following information:

● Table 1: SuccessFactors Foundation Instance information

Field Details

ENVIRONMENT Select your environment from the list of available environments below this table.

COMPANY ID Company Id as it appears in Provisioning.

Note

ID is case-sensitive.

COMPANY NAME Company Name as it appears in Provisioning.

SAP JAM PRODUCT Basic (Included with SuccessFactors Foundation Only), Advanced (For SuccessFactors

Foundation bundles only), Advanced Plus, Enterprise.

ADMIN ACCOUNT NAME First / Last name of the Admin account that will be used to sync the Employee data from

SuccessFactors Foundation to SAP Jam. The account must have a minimum of full Employee Export permissions.

Note

If this user is deactivated in SuccessFactors Foundation, the sync will fail. We recom

mend using a System Admin account, not a personal Admin account.

ADMIN ACCOUNT USER

NAME

Please provide the Username for above Admin Account. This username is needed for the

API calls between SAP Jam and SuccessFactors Foundation.

Note

If this user is deactivated in SuccessFactors Foundation, the sync will fail. We recommend using a System Admin account, not a personal Admin account. User name is case

sensitive.

TEST OR PROD INSTANCE Select if this is a test or production instance. For production instances, specify if this in

stance is Live.

● The following is the list of data centers from which the SuccessFactors Platform and the SAP Jam

environments are available:

8 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started

Page 9: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 9/228

Table 2: SuccessFactors Foundation and SAP Jam data centers

Old

name

New

name

Location SuccessFactors Platform (Production & Preview) SAP Jam (Prod. & Pre

view)

DC2 Amster

dam1 /HC

M

Amster

dam, NL,

EU

https://

performancemanager.successfactors.eu

https://hcm2preview.sapsf.eu

https://

jam2.sapjam.com

DC4 Chan

dler1 /HC

M

Chandler,

AZ, US

https://

performancemanager4.successfactors.com

https://hcm4preview.sapsf.com

https://

jam4.sapjam.com

DC8 Ash

burn1 /HC

M

Ashburn,

VA, US

https://

performancemanager8.successfactors.com

https://hcm8preview.sapsf.com

https://

jam8.sapjam.com

DC10 Sydney1 /

HCM

Sydney,

NSW, AUS

https://

performancemanager10.successfactors.com

https://hcm10preview.sapsf.com

https://

jam10.sapjam.com

DC12 Rot1 /HC

M

St. Leon-

Rot, DE,

EU

https://

performancemanager5.successfactors.eu

https://hcm12preview.sapsf.eu

https://

jam12.sapjam.com

DC15 Shang

hai1 /HCM

Shanghai,

CN

https://performancemanager15.sapsf.cn https://

jam15.sapsf.cn

DC17 Toronto1 /

HCM

Toronto,

ON, CA

https://hcm17.sapsf.com

https://hcm17preview.sapsf.com

https://

jam17.sapjam.com

DC18 Mos

cow1 /HC

M

Moscow,

RU

https://hcm18.sapsf.com

https://hcm18preview.sapsf.com

https://

jam18.sapjam.com

Note: Services shown in cells with yellow backgrounds provide production environments only.

Automatic user provisioning

SAP Jam gets its user information from SuccessFactors Foundation via a data transfer. The following table

explains how SAP Jam employee profile attributes get mapped from SuccessFactors Foundation.

Table 3: SuccessFactors Foundation to SAP Jam user attribute mappings

SAP Jam Collabora

tion attribute

SF Foundation import attribute Comment

Status STATUS

Locale DEFAULT_LOCALE Real-time sync: The data sync of this field is done in near-real

time, allowing immediate language switching in the UI.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 9

Page 10: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 10/228

SAP Jam Collabora

tion attribute

SF Foundation import attribute Comment

Timezone TIMEZONE Real-time sync: The data sync of this field is done in near-realtime.

Country COUNTRY Used by the Auto Group feature.

UserId USERID Auto-generated by SuccessFactors Foundation; for internal

system use.

UserName USERNAME

Department DEPARTMENT Used by the Auto Group feature.

Division DIVISION Used by the Auto Group feature.

Jobcode JOBCODE Used by the Auto Group feature.

Location LOCATION Used by the Auto Group feature.Photo PHOTO

First Name FIRSTNAME Real-time sync: The data sync of this field is done in near-real

time.

Last Name LASTNAME Real-time sync: The data sync of this field is done in near-real

time.

Job Title TITLE Real-time sync: The data sync of this field is done in near-real

time.

Start Date HIREDATE Used by the Auto Group feature.

Email EMAIL

Business Phone BIZ_PHONE

Manager MANAGER Used by the Auto Group feature.

Direct Report Auto-computed from all users with Manager = current

USERID.

Supported Languages

Table 4: User type access to company features

Language SuccessFactors SAP Jam

Collabora

tion

Language SuccessFactors SAP Jam

Collabora

tion

English (US) Yes Yes Arabic Yes Yes

Bulgarian Yes Yes Chinese (Simplified) Yes Yes

Chinese (Traditional) Yes Yes Croatian Yes Yes

Czech Yes Yes Danish Yes Yes

Dutch (Netherlands) Yes Yes English (UK) Yes Yes

Finnish Yes Yes French (Canadian) Yes Yes

10 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started

Page 11: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 11/228

Language SuccessFactors SAP Jam

Collabora

tion

Language SuccessFactors SAP Jam

Collabora

tion

French (France) Yes Yes German (Germany) Yes Yes

German (Swiss) Yes No Greek (Greece) Yes Yes

Hebrew Yes Yes Hindi Yes Yes

Hungarian Yes Yes Indonesian Yes Yes

Italian Yes Yes Japanese Yes Yes

Korean Yes Yes Malaysian Yes Yes

Norwegian (Bokmål) Yes Yes Polish Yes Yes

Portuguese (Brazil) Yes Yes Portuguese (Portugal) Yes Yes

Romanian Yes Yes Russian Yes Yes

Serbian (Serbia) Yes Yes Slovak Yes Yes

Slovenian Yes Yes Spanish (Mexico) Yes No

Spanish (Spain) Yes Yes Swedish Yes Yes

Thai Yes Yes Turkish Yes Yes

Ukrainian Yes Yes Vietnamese Yes Yes

Welsh Yes Yes

Note

Language selection is configured in SuccessFactors Foundation.

1.4 SAP Jam administrators and the Admin console

SAP Jam administration is performed in the Admin console by two types of administrators: support

administrators and company administrators.

To access the Admin console

1. As an SAP Jam company administrator or support administrator, click the Cog icon at the top of any SAP Jam

page.

A context menu is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 11

Page 12: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 12/228

Figure 1: The cog icon's context menu

2. Select Admin from the context menu.

If you don't have support administrator or company administrator privileges, this option will not appear in the

context menu.

Figure 2: The Admin console

12 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started

Page 13: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 13/228

Group administrators

Group administrators have privileged capabilities to control the functionality of the SAP Jam Collaboration groupsthat they have created, or that they have been granted the privileges to help administer. Those privileges to not

extend to other groups, nor to the SAP Jam Collaboration  Admin console. For documentation on administering

groups, see the SAP Jam Collaboration Group Administration Guide.

Support administrators

Support administrators have access to a sub-set of the functionality available to company administrators. The role

was established to provide company administrators with some relief of their workload by giving support

administrators access to many of the day-to-day duties of SAP Jam Collaboration administration. This alsoprotects the stability of the SAP Jam Collaboration service by limiting access to features that can have great

impact on the functionality of the SAP Jam Collaboration service to a smaller group of company administrators

whose main duties are the configuration and maintenance of SAP Jam Collaboration.

Table 5: The support administrator menu and links to its documentation

Figure 3: The support

administrator menu

Support Administrators have access to the following sections of the Admin console:

● Content Administration: Configure Content Administration options [page 33].

● Users: Users administration [page 57].

● SAP Jam mobile app: Configure the SAP Jam Mobile app [page 72].

● Custom Profile: Custom Profile administration [page 76].

Group Templates: Group templates administration [page 80].● Auto Groups: Group templates administration [page 80].

● Extranet Management: Extranet Management [page 92].

Company administrators

Company Administrators have access to the full range of capabilities within the Admin console. This gives them

the greatest power to change the look, feel, and functions of the SAP Jam service, but it also requires greater

knowledge of the SAP Jam service, carries a greater responsibility, and therefore typically also requires a greater

focus of their job duties on configuring and maintaining the SAP Jam service in a manner that suits the needs of

their organization.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 13

Page 14: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 14/228

Company administrators have access to all sections of the Admin console:

Table 6: The company administrator menu and links to its documentation

Figure 4: Admin console

sections

●General: View your SAP Jam service General information [page 15].

● Features: Configure SAP Jam Features [page 19].

● Customize your Homepage: Customize your Homepage [page 27].

● Branding and Support: Configure SAP Jam Branding and Support options [page 27].

● Content Administration: Configure Content Administration options [page 33].

● Email Templates: Configure Email Templates options [page 38].

● Getting Started Wizard: Configure the Getting Started Wizard [page 41].

● Custom Terms of Service: Configure a Custom Terms of Service [page 44].

● Extranet Terms of Service: Configure an Extranet Terms of Service [page 45].

● Kudos: Configure Kudos options [page 46].

● Security: Configure Security options [page 49].

● Compliance: Configure Compliance monitoring [page 51].

● Users (privileges management): User privileges administration [page 62].

● Users (member lists management): Create and manage member lists [page 64].

Note

This section is also available in the SAP Jam Group Administration Guide, where it can

be viewed in context with other related group administration concepts and proce

dures. To view this content, see the SAP Jam Group Administration Guide.

● SAP Jam Mobile app: Configure the SAP Jam Mobile app [page 72].

● Custom Profile: Custom Profile administration [page 76].

● Group Templates: Group templates administration [page 80].

Note

This section is also available in the SAP Jam Group Administration Guide, where it can

be viewed in context with other related group administration concepts and proce

dures. To view this content, see the SAP Jam Group Administration Guide.

● Auto Groups: Create an auto group [page 84].

Note

This section is also available in the SAP Jam Group Administration Guide, where it can

be viewed in context with other related group administration concepts and proce

dures. To view this content, see the SAP Jam Group Administration Guide.

● Hashtags: Hashtags administration [page 90].● Extranet Management: Extranet Management [page 92].

● Reports: Company administrator Reports [page 94].

● External Applications: This page covers two main types of application that can be integrated in SAP Jam:

business records and document repositories, each of which is documented in separate sections:

○ Business Records: For information on integrating data from other business-critical applications—such as

SAP CRM, SAP ECC (SD), SAP Cloud for Customer, and SuccessFactors Learning—into SAP Jam, see the 

Integrate business records [page 116]. If you plan on developing a new or custom business records

integration, see the External Applications section in the SAP Jam Developer Guide.

14 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started

Page 15: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 15/228

○ Document Repositories: For information on integrating document repositories—such as SharePoint

2010 or 2013, SAP Extended ECM by OpenText, Alfresco One 4.2, Office 365 SharePoint Online Sites,

SAP Mobile Documents, and Box—into SAP Jam, see Integrate document repositories [page 165].

● Widget Builders: Use the Widget Builders [page 215].● OpenSearch Clients: Federate SAP Jam search results into SharePoint searches [page 174].

● OpenSocial Gadgets: Add an OpenSocial Gadget [page 205]. If you plan on developing your own OpenSocial

gadget, see the OpenSocial Gadgets section in the SAP Jam Developer Guide.

● OAuth Clients: Add an OAuth Client [page 158].

● SAML Trusted IDPs: Add SAML Trusted IDPs [page 161].

● SAML Local Identity Provider: Configure SAP Jam as a SAML Local Identity Provider [page 163].

● Gamification: Integrate SAP Jam with gamification vendors [page 210].

The organization of the SAP Jam Administrator Guide

This guide provides a task-based approach to configuring and maintaining the SAP Jam service. This manual is

organized into the following chapters:

1. The Get Started chapter, in which this section appears, provides an introduction to the SAP Jam system and

its administration.

2. The Configuration chapter deals with operations that are largely one-time set-up tasks, although they can be

modified whenever required.

3. The Administration chapter deals with the day-to-day tasks of running the SAP Jam service.

4. The Integrations chapter provides the instructions required for both integrating external applications into

SAP Jam and integrating SAP Jam into external applications.

5. The Get Support chapter provides a link to the website where you can file SAP Jam Support requests.

1.5 View your SAP Jam service General information

The  Admin General  page shows some general information about your SAP Jam service.

To view your SAP Jam service General information

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select General from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin General  page is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 15

Page 16: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 16/228

Figure 5: Admin > General information

2. The following information is shown:

○ Host: The domain name of the SAP Jam server group that your instance of SAP Jam is running on. The

domain name is always in the form jam#.sapjam.com, where jam# is the word "jam" followed by a one

or two-digit number that indicates the specific data center.

○ Revision: The particular revision of the SAP Jam software load that your instance of the SAP Jam service

is running.

○ Product Version: The package of features and capabilities that are available in your instance of the SAP

Jam service.

○ Product Instance name: This is the name set in the Branding page of the Admin console.

○ Integrated Company Name: [For integrated companies only] The name of your company as set in

SuccessFactors Foundation.

○ Storage Usage: The horizontal bar indicator shows the percentage of the purchased storage space used,

as well as numeric values for the total amount of cloud storage that your company has purchased, and

the amount of that storage used in both percentage and gigabyte (GB) values.

Note

Notifications are sent to company administrators when storage used hits 80% and 100% of their

allocation. If you receive an "80% usage" notification, you should either free up storage by deleting old

content or contact your SAP Jam Support representative to purchase more storage space. If you

receive a "100% usage" notification, your users will no longer be able to upload content, so acting to

resolve the problem becomes vital. These notifications will occur daily, are not configurable, and

cannot be turned off except by taking action to resolve the situation.

○ External User Licenses Purchased: The number of external user accounts that your SAP Jam service will

support according to your contract.

16 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started

Page 17: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 17/228

○ External User Licenses Used: The number of external user accounts that your SAP Jam service is

currently using.

1.6 Initial administrator tasks

Some of the key tasks that SAP Jam Administrators should perform in an initial setup are listed below, with links

to the sections of this document that explain how to accomplish these tasks:

● Determine who can create groups: See the last option in the User Management section of Configure SAP

Jam Features [page 19].

● Use auto groups: To create groups whose membership is set using member lists, see Chapter 3, “Member

lists and auto groups”, in the SAP Jam Group Administration Guide.

● Apply your organization's branding to SAP Jam: To set up Jam with your organization's branding see

Configure SAP Jam Branding and Support options [page 27].

● Set up a support group using the Help and Support template: One of the most effective tools in on-

boarding your users to SAP Jam is to create a Jam Support group based on the Help and Support Template.

To do this, see Chapter 2, “Groups, group templates, and subgroups”, in the SAP Jam Group Administration

Guide.

● Set up internal and external Terms of Service: See:

○ Configure a Custom Terms of Service [page 44].

○ Configure an Extranet Terms of Service [page 45].

● Set up custom help: To set up custom help, you can specify a URL to the help location of either a group or

another online source. To do this, see the last section, Help Settings, in Configure SAP Jam Branding and

Support options [page 27].

● Set your SAP Jam support contact email address: in the View your SAP Jam service General information

[page 15] page.

● Generate company-wide reports: For reports on user adoption of SAP Jam, and reports on users' behavior in

SAP Jam, see Company administrator Reports [page 94]. Note that there are also reports available to Group

Administrators: see section 5.6, “Run group reports”, in the SAP Jam Group Administration Guide.

● On-boarding Users: Encourage your users to fill out all the information requested in the Getting Started

Wizard: filling out their profile, adding their expertise, and installing the SAP Jam mobile app on their mobile

devices.

1.7 Single sign-on and deep linking

Deep linking occurs when a hypertext link points to a page on a web site other than its home page that involves

some navigation into the structure of the web site. For SAP Jam, deep linking is dependent on the single sign-on

(SSO) configuration, which is typically done by Professional Services upon implementation. This can be, for

example, a standard SAML 2.0-based single log on. If SSO is configured correctly, most Jam URLs should take the

user directly to the indicated SAP Jam page after a series of redirects from SAP Jam to the company IDP and back

to SAP Jam. There are some notable special cases, which are outlined below.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 17

Page 18: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 18/228

SAP Jam handling of deep linking

In normal SAP Jam usage, a user logs in and SAP Jam sets a cookie in the user's browser that indicates whichcompany the user belongs to. When a user clicks on a deep link such as https://jam#.sapjam.com/groups/

wall/0Hm4gyKS4qegqd2qkkl8Xf, SAP Jam looks for that cookie, but it might not be found if:

● The user is new to SAP Jam and hasn't logged in before

● The user's browser configuration is set to delete all cookies on shutdown

● The user has manually deleted the required cookie or all cookies from their browser

So, when a user clicks a deep link for a page within SAP Jam, it looks for the cookie that identifies which company

a user belongs to. One of two things happen:

1. If SAP Jam finds the cookie, it will know which company the user belongs to and it will forward the user to their

company-specific SSO page.

2. If SAP Jam cannot find the cookie, it will do one of two things:1. SAP Jam will determine which company the content belongs to by analyzing the URL. There are two

possible actions:

1. If the URL is to a private internal group, SAP Jam forwards the user to that company's SSO page.

2. If the URL is to an external group, a challenge is encountered because internal users (company

employees) and external users (guest members) are authenticated in different SSO log-in pages. To

deal with this, SAP Jam presents a screen to the user, asking them if they are an employee of the

company or if they are a guest:

1. If they answer that they are an employee, they are forwarded to the employees' SSO log on page.

2. If they answer that they are a guest, they are forwarded to the guests' SSO log on page.

2. If SAP Jam finds one of the very few URLs that it cannot determine what company the user belongs to,

such as happens if the link is to a user's home page (which is always something like https://

jam4.sapjam.com/auth/status), then there needs to have been extra information added to the URL

to allow deep linking to work properly even in such a situation. For example:

○ https://jam#.sapjam.com/example.com/auth/status

○ https://jam#.sapjam.com/auth/status?

companyId=innojam#&idp=sales.successfactors#.eu

Once the user successfully authenticates against the corporate SSO they are redirected to SAP Jam with the deep

link. Note that SSO configuration is a SuccessFactors Foundation feature that is generally set up by Professional

Services at the time of implementation.

18 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get started

Page 19: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 19/228

2 Configuration

2.1 Configure SAP Jam Features

The  Admin Features  page allows you to enable or disable many SAP Jam features and options.

To configure your SAP Jam features

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Features from the left navigation sidebar to set which SAP Jam

features and options are available to your users.

The  Admin Features  page is displayed.

2. Set any of the following options:

Compliance options:

Figure 6: Compliance options

○ Enable Compliance Monitor: Select this option to monitor the content posted to SAP Jam and flag items

that contain terms that are listed in the Compliance Dictionary. See Configure Compliance monitoring

[page 51] for details on managing this feature. Enabling the alert does not scan content retroactively,

only from the date the alert is enabled. Disabling the alert permits users to post content to SAP Jam

without flagging Compliance Dictionary violations. If content has already been scanned prior to disabling,

flagged items remain listed in the Compliance Pending Flagged Items  table.

○ Enable Profanity Monitor: Select this option to monitor the content posted to SAP Jam and flag items

that contain terms that are listed in the Profanity Dictionary. See Configure Compliance monitoring [page

51] for details on managing this feature. Enabling the alert does not scan content retroactively, only from

the date the alert is enabled. Disabling the alert permits users to post profanities to SAP Jam without

flagging Profanity Dictionary violations. If content has already been scanned prior to disabling, flagged

items remain listed in the Compliance Pending Flagged Items  table.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 19

Page 20: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 20/228

○ Enable Unscannable Filter: Select this option to scan the file names, titles, and descriptions of otherwise

unscannable content (such as images, videos, and zip files) for occurrences of the terms in the

Compliance and Profanity dictionaries. This alert does not scan content retroactively.

User Management options:

Figure 7: User Management options

○ Enable users to edit their profile information: [This feature is only available for companies that are not

integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7].] Deselect this option to prevent users from making

changes to their user profiles. Turning this option off is desirable if your organization imports user profileinformation from a source external to SAP Jam.

○ Skip the getting started wizard: [This feature is only available for companies that are not integrated with

SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7].] Toggles whether the getting started wizard is displayed to new

users upon their initial log-on. The getting started wizard displays a minimum of two panes of

recommendations to new users who are logging on for the first time: one pane displays up to ten people

that the new user might choose to follow, the other pane displays a list of groups they might choose to

join. A possible two more panes can be displayed, as is set in the Configure the Getting Started Wizard

[page 41] section.

○ Show Profile Photos: User profile photos will appear beside users' posts in forums and feeds, as well as

several other locations. Deselect this option to turn off the display of user profile photos.

○ Allow Users to Upload a Custom Profile Photo: Deselect this option to prevent users from uploading

their own user profile photos. Turning this option off is desirable if your organization imports user profile

photos from a source external to SAP Jam. This option is automatically disabled if Show Profile Photos is

deselected.

○ Show Profile Job Titles: If selected, job titles will be displayed in users' profiles for each user who has a

job title. If deselected, job titles will not be displayed in users' profiles.

○ Enable all users to disable other users: [This feature is only available for companies that are not

integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7].] Deselect this option to allow only company

administrators to disable a user.

○ Enable new users to sign-up and join this <Product_Instance_name> network: [This feature is only

available for companies that are not integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7].] If this option is

selected, new users within your organization's network will be able to create an account on your SAP Jam

service. Deselect this option to limit account creation to company administrators.

20 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 21: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 21/228

○ Enable all users to invite new users into this <Product_Instance_name> network: [This feature is only

available for companies that are not integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7].] Select this

option to allow all users to invite new users to join your organization's SAP Jam. Deselect this option to

limit this ability to company administrators.○ Require company admin approval for new users of this <Product_Instance_name> network: [This

feature is only available for companies that are not integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7].]

Select this option to limit the ability to invite new users to join your organization's SAP Jam instance to

SAP Jam company administrators.

○ Enable users to create their own groups: Select this option to allow users to create their own groups. If

deselected, only SAP Jam administrators can create groups.

○ Show profile pages for alumni: Select this option to allow users to continue to view the profile pages of

people who have left your organization.

○ Clear profile info for alumni: Select this option to remove the personal information and image of users

who have left your organization from SAP Jam. If this option is selected, alumni users' office location

information is removed, but their manager and job title information is retained.Feature Management options:

Figure 8: Feature Management options (part 1)

○ Enable API: Enable the API to allow SAP Jam to be integrated with the SAP Jam Mobile app, SharePoint,

and SuccessFactors Learning.

○ Enable File Sharing: Enable this feature to allow users to upload files to SAP Jam.

○ Enable Feed Share: Enable this feature to add a Share button, to feed entries about their own actions,

which allows users to share those updates with a specified group or with the entire company, as shown in

the following image.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 21

Page 22: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 22/228

Figure 9: Enable Feed Share result

○ Enable Content Rating: Enable this feature to allow users to rate content that has been uploaded to SAP

Jam.○ Enable External Group Creation: Select this option to allow the creation of private groups that are

intended for, and accessible to, users who are not located within your organization's network.

○ Enable Chat: In SAP Jam, users can create chat rooms and invite colleagues to join. From the Chat

Rooms tab, users can see a list of available chat rooms in your company and view a transcript for each

room. Enable this feature to allow your users to create chat rooms.

Note

Chat rooms are public and available to everyone in your company.

○ Enable Company Directory: Enable this feature to allow users to see your company directory and look for

other users.○ Enable Alumni Directory: Enable this feature to allow users to see your alumni directory and look for

former colleagues.

○ Wikis: Wiki pages let your users create and share content in SAP Jam. Wiki pages are an online content

asset residing within a group or available across the company from a user's profile page. In a wiki page,

your users can create differently formatted text, tables, pictures, or video content. In addition, your users

can attach any type of file and dynamic widgets to a wiki page. Users can assign existing tags to a wiki

page or create their own ones. Enable this feature to allow your users to create wiki pages in SAP Jam.

○ Enable Company Wiki as default login landing page for all company users: You can configure SAP Jam

so that all company users are automatically redirected to the company wiki as their default start page

when they login.

22 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 23: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 23/228

Figure 10: Feature Management options (part 2)

○ Application Launcher: Enables users to open, edit, and save Microsoft Office documents in SAP Jam as if

they were on their local file system when they click on the application launcher button for the file in the

SAP Jam Content section. This allows them to edit the file without having to download and upload it.

○ Private Messages: Allows you to control the availability of private messaging between the users in yourorganization.

○ Recommendation Tiles: Enable this feature to display recommendation tiles in the Feed Updates section

of a Group.

○ Videos: SAP Jam lets users create videos using either screen capture or webcam. To allow your users to

create and view videos in SAP Jam, this feature must be enabled.

Note

For SAP Jam to play a video, the Adobe Flash Player must be installed in your users browsers. Also, in

order to record a video, Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.7.1 or higher is required. For more

information, see System Requirements [page 5].

○ Include Private Group Details: Select this feature to allow SAP Jam administrators to view private group

names in reporting and Compliance features. Additionally, SAP Jam administrators will be able to run

reports against a specific private group.

Figure 11: Feature Management options (part 3)

○ Enable integrations: Select this feature to allow users to sync in news feeds from other services such as

Google Calendar, Twitter, and Tripit.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 23

Page 24: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 24/228

Note

In order to set up integrations, users need to have an account with each external service.

○ Show Recruitment Data (non-integrated)/Hire Date (integrated) in member profile: Select this

feature to display hire date information in users' profile pages.

○ Send daily alert emails to all members: SAP Jam sends users content and updates via email. Select this

feature to allow SAP Jam to send daily alert emails to all members.

○ Send active task reminder to all members: Select this feature to allow SAP Jam to send active tasks

reminders to all members.

○ Allow User Level Reporting: Select this feature to allow SAP Jam users to view and run group reports.

○ Restrict access to Company Admins only: This option depends on the Allow User Level Reporting

option being selected. If you select this option, only company administrators will be able to run and view

group reports.

○Enable Gamification: Select this feature to allow integration with gamification vendors.

○ Enable Microsoft® Lync® integration: Select this option to enable use of Microsoft® Lync® when users

click on Messa ge at the bottom of any SAP Jam user pop-up (hover card).

○ Enable Employee Central Time Off integration Select this option to enable Employee Central Time Off

bookings to be displayed in SAP Jam.

○ Enable away alerts by default for new time offs Select this option to allow Employee Central Time Off to

display away alerts for users on time off when other users search for or enter a user's name who has set

their Employee Central Time Off.

Note

The preceding two options require that you have performed the Employee Central Time Off integration

as documented in the following documents, which are located in the SuccessFactors HCM Suite

Integration section of the SAP Help Portal:

○ Time Off and Employee Central Payroll Integration Guide

○ Metadata Framework (MDF) Implementation Guide , Chapter 10 MDF Security Using Role-Based

Permissions, sections 10.1 and 10.2. Note that you may need to modify rules for the EmployeeTime

object (see "Adding Rules", section 3.3.4).

○ Hide contact information for extranet users: Select this feature to hide information on other extranet

users when a user is logged in as an extranet user. This is a privacy option that hides contact information

on extranet users from other extranet users.

○ Enable search appliance integration: Select this feature to allow integration with your company's search

appliance. Select the search appliance authorization mechanism from the OAuth client for searchappliance integration drop-down menu. This menu is populated from the  Admin > OAuth Clients [page

158] page.

Deprecated Features: Select any of the following deprecated features to enable them:

○ Company section

○ External widgets (icon in wiki editor)

24 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 25: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 25/228

Figure 12: Deprecated Features

Note

Deprecated features still work and are fully supported, however SAP reserves the right to remove these

deprecated features in any future release.

3. When you have the feature availability and feature behavior options set to your satisfaction, click Save

changes.

Note

If you do not click Save changes, the options that you have selected will not be applied.

2.1.1 Microsoft® Lync® integration

Microsoft® Lync® can now be enabled on SAP Jam so that users can chat within Lync and check to see if otherusers are online.

Table 7: SAP Jam-Microsoft Lync integration enhancements

Enhancement Description

Viewable Lync online sta

tus● When the company administrator has enabled the Lync integration, the user will be able to see

the online status of a user when they place their cursor over the other user’s profile card in a

feed item.

Figure 13: Profile card with Lync status

● When the user clicks on the Lync status on the profile card, the Lync application opens.

Enable Lync integration   ● A company administrator can now enable Lync for SAP Jam.

Before you work with the Lync integration in SAP Jam, please note the following Lync version and browser

compatibility matrix. "Yes" denotes that the combination is supported based on major functionality testing."*"

denotes that it is supported with exceptions: 1. The status update is not reflected in SAP Jam. 2. The status

update is not reflected when you place cursor over the profile card.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 25

Page 26: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 26/228

Table 8: Browser support for Lync and Office versions

Lync and Of

fice versions

Internet Ex

plorer 8

Internet

Explorer 9

Internet Ex

plorer 10

Internet Ex

plorer 11

Mozilla

Firefox 17

ESR

Mozilla

Firefox 24

Mozilla

Firefox

(current)

Google

Chrome

Lync 2010 (32

bit) Office

2010 (32 bit)

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lync 2010 (in

stalled 64 bit

but run as 32

bit) Office

2010 (64 bit)

* Yes * *

Lync 2013 (32

bit) Office

2013 (32 bit)

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

(Chrome

v.42

and later

is

not sup

ported)

Lync 2013 (64

bit) Office

2013 (64 bit)

Browsers (64

bit)

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

(Chrome

v.42

and later

is

not sup

ported)

Lync 2013 (64

bit) Office

2013 (64 bit)

Browsers (32

bit)

* Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

(Chrome

v.42

and later

is

not sup

ported)

Note

For Lync 2010, please note the following system and browser pre-requisites for enabling integration with SAP

Jam:

● Microsoft Office 2010 must be installed.

● Lync 2010 must be installed (separately from Microsoft Office).

● For Internet Explorer:

○ Add SAP Jam to Trusted Sites list.

○ Enable "NameCtrlClass" under Manage Add-ons.

Note

For Lync 2013, please note the following browser pre-requisites for enabling integration with SAP Jam:

26 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 27: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 27/228

Table 9: Browser prerequisites for Lync 2013 integration with SAP Jam

Internet Explorer Mozilla Firefox Google Chrome

● Microsoft Office 2013 with instal

led SharePoint plugin

● Microsoft Office 2013 with instal

led SharePoint plugin

● Microsoft Office 2013 with installed

SharePoint plugin

● Add SAP Jam to Trusted Sites list   ● Enable the plugin prompt   ● Enable plugins

● Enable "NameCtrlClass" under

Manage Add-ons

Note

The SAP Jam— Lync integration does not currently support cross-company federation.

2.2 Customize your Homepage

TBD

2.3 Configure SAP Jam Branding and Support options

There are many options available for customizing the look and feel of SAP Jam to match your company's

branding.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Branding and Support from the left navigation sidebar to

configure the stylistic and support options for your SAP Jam service.

The  Admin Branding and Support  page is displayed.

2. In the top section of the Branding and Support page, you can set the following options:

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 27

Page 28: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 28/228

Figure 14: Main Branding and Support options

○ Name: The name of your company as it was set in SuccessFactors Platform Provisioning.

Note

This field is not editable. The string shown cannot be modified. The string does not appear anywhere in

the SAP Jam user interface.

○ SuccessFactors Product name: [This feature is only available for companies that are integrated with

SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7].] The name given to the SuccessFactors Foundation product in

various places in the user interface.

○ Enable SuccessFactors Theming: [This feature is only available for companies that are integrated with

SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7].] You must have the SuccessFactors Foundation user interface,

version 12 or higher, installed for this option to appear and be selectable. Enables UI themes set in

SuccessFactors Foundation to be applied to SAP Jam pages.

28 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 29: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 29/228

Note

Enabling SuccessFactors theming disables the following features in the SAP Jam top bar: the facet

dropdown for searches, the bell (notifications) icon, the Tasks icon, and the Messages icon.

○ Product Instance Name: The name of SAP Jam that users will see in various places in the SAP Jam user

interface.

○ Color Theme: This form allows you to set the text and background colors for six common elements of the

SAP Jam user interface. Colors must be set in hexidecimal values in the form "#nnnnnn" (without the

quotation marks). For example, "#000066" would be navy blue. The color can be previewed in the small

box to the right of the text box.

Note

Care must be taken to ensure that elements remain visible within the SAP Jam user interface. Please

check the UI after making changes.

○ Current Logo: The current logo is displayed. Click Browse to select a new logo from your local drive that

you want to upload and use. This logo will appear in various places in the SAP Jam user interface.

Note

The image will be resized to 180 x 50 pixels.

3. In the Custom Footer section of the Branding and Support page, you can set a Custom Footer that will appear

on most pages of the SAP Jam user interface.

Figure 15: Custom Footer options

You can replace the footer displayed throughout SAP Jam with any HTML content entered in this text box.

Again, you are responsible for the impact of any such changes upon the appearance of your SAP Jam

instance.

4. In the Email Settings section of the Branding and Support page, you can elect to:

○ Include the current company logo in the email header

○ Include the SAP Jam logo in the email footer

These settings will affect the email notifications sent by SAP Jam.

Figure 16: Email Settings options

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 29

Page 30: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 30/228

5. In the Help Settings section of the Branding and Support page, you can set the following options:

Figure 17: Help Settings options

○ Display on-line help in Settings drop-down menu or via global help icon:—The default if this option is

selected is to present a link to the SAP Jam Support Center group.

○ Enable a custom help page—This option allows you to have the help links that are enabled in the

preceding option to link to an online help URL of your choice. This URL must be set in the Help Page URL

text box below this option.

6. In the Extranet Log-On Introductory Text section of the Branding and Support page, you can set the

language(s) that the introductory message will be displayed in. When users are invited to External Groups,

they receive a link to the Extranet landing page. Upon logging in to that page, external users are presented

with an introductory message.

30 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 31: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 31/228

Figure 18: Extranet Log On Introductory Text options

To set the language that the introductory message for external users will be displayed in:

1. Select Enable custom introductory text.

The Select a Language for the Introductory Text dialog box is displayed.

2. Click the drop-down menu to select the language in which you want the introductory message for external

users to be shown and click OK.

The dialog box will close and the selected language will appear below the checkbox.

3. Click in the edit box to the right of the label for the language that you just selected and enter the message

that you want to be presented to external users in their login page.

4. Optionally, click Add Another Language below the initially selected language to add an additional language

in which the external user introductory message will be displayed and repeat steps 2 and 3 above.

Also, the initial language selected will be the default. If you want to change which language is the default,

click the cog icon beside the language that you want, and select Set as Default from the context menu.

To remove a language option, click the cog icon beside the added language that you want to remove and

select Remove from the context menu.

7. In the Extranet Log-On Background Image section of the Branding and Support page, you can set the following

options:

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 31

Page 32: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 32/228

Figure 19:

Extranet Log On Background Image

 options

○Use custom background image: This option will enable the use of a custom background image forexternal users.

○ Background image should be tiled: This option will tile the selected background image, allowing you to

use a small, low-bandwidth image for the background image for external users.

○ Browse (or Choose File): Click this button to find an image on your local drive and upload it to be used as

the background image for SAP Jam pages for external users.

○ Enable a custom help page: If the Enable help links in user's drop-down menu and page footer  option

is enabled in the Help Settings section described above, then enabling this option allows you to set a

different custom help page for external users.

○ Help Page URL: Enter the publicly accessible URL in this text box for the custom help page that you want

external users to be able to access.

8. In the Support Contact section of the Branding and Support page, you can set the SAP Jam support contactemail address by doing the following:

Figure 20: Support Contact option

9. When you have all of the Branding and Support settings as you want them, click on Save changes to applyyour settings.

Note

Also, different user interface labeling schemes are available for organizations that are not enterprise

corporations (for example educational institutions and municipalities). To configure the UI with a different

labeling scheme, contact your customer support representative. The labeling changes that are affected

are:

○ Default, company scheme: Company/Employee/Manager

○ Alternate, organization scheme: Organization/Member/Supervisor

○ Alternate, institution scheme: Institution/Person/Supervisor

32 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 33: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 33/228

2.4 Configure Content Administration options

The  Admin Content Administration  section allows you to manage Abuse Reporting, Purge Settings, and

 Auditing.

Enable Content Administration

Content Administration is disabled by default. To enable Content Administration, do the following:Usage Auditing

1. UsageAccess the Admin console [page 11] and select Content Administration from the left navigation sidebar.The  Admin Content Administration  section is displayed.

Figure 21: Content Administration section

2. Click Enable Content Administration.

Content administration is enabled, the button label changes to Disable Content Administration, and any items

marked as inappropriate will appear in the Items Pending Review panel.

Configure Abuse Reporting

 Abuse Reporting allows SAP Jam users to report content as either being spam or as being abusive. Abuse

reporting is turned off by default.

To enable and configure Abuse Reporting:

1. In the  Admin Content Administration  section, ensure that Content Administration has been enabled

(the button at the top of the page should be labeled "Disable Content Administration"), and click Configure

 Abuse Reporting in the Abuse Reporting tab.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 33

Page 34: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 34/228

Figure 22: Abuse Reporting tab

The abuse reporting configuration options are displayed in the  Abuse Reporting tab.

Figure 23: Abuse Reporting options

2. Select the Enable reporting of inappropriate content check box.

Below the Enable reporting of inappropriate content check box are two sliding controls.

3. Set the Abusive content reporting threshold by positioning the slider control to the number of reports that you

want to require before a particular piece of content is submitted to the company administrator for review.

You can set a number from 1 to 10.

34 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 35: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 35/228

4. Set the Spam reporting threshold by positioning the slider control to the number of reports that you want to

require before a particular piece of content is submitted to the company administrator for review.

You can set a number from 1 to 10.

5. When you have the abuse reporting options set as you want them, click Save changes.Your abuse reporting options are saved and set, and any content that is reported by your users and meets

these criteria is displayed in the Items Pending Review panel, below the configuration options.

Manage Reported Abuses

When users have tagged group activity as spam or abuse the number of times to equal the configured thresholds,

the content or feed posts are removed from view and go into a queue for the company administrator to review and

decide how to handle, and notifications are sent to the company administrator to let them know there is

inappropriate content requiring their review.

To respond to an Abuse Report:

1. Open the  Admin Content Administration  section.

The reported abuse(s) that users have submitted will appear in the Items Pending Review panel.

Figure 24: Review reported abuses

Each reported piece of content is displayed as it originally appeared in SAP Jam, with the name of the user

who posted it, and the date that they posted it. There may also be some details shown of the content, such as

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 35

Page 36: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 36/228

the URLs for hyper-linked text or images. Also, the name of the person who reported the abuse is shown, their

comment about why they found it inappropriate if they added a comment, and a statement of how long ago

the item was marked as inappropriate.

2. Review the item and click the button for the appropriate response:○ Click Restore to return the content to its original location and viewable state.

○ Click Delete to remove the content from SAP Jam.

Purge Settings

The Purge Settings feature allows administrators to permanently delete items in all users' trash that are older

than a set age.

1. Open the  Admin Content Administration  section, ensure that Content Administration has been enabled(the button at the top of the page should be labeled "Disable Content Administration"), and click the Purge

Settings tab.

The Purge Settings options are displayed.

Figure 25: Purge Settings

2. Select Automatically purge items that have been in the Trash for (configurable) days. to turn trash purging on

for all of your company's users.

3. Set the number of days to indicate how long items must be in your company's users' trash before they are

automatically purged.

4. Click Submit.

Your SAP Jam instance will perform a daily purge of all items that have been in your company's users' trash

cans for longer than the set number of days.

36 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 37: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 37/228

Audit Usage

The Audit Usage feature allows the company administrator to view a single user's complete history of what pagesor content (office documents, PDFs, images, videos, blogs, or wikis) that a user has viewed (including other user's

profile pages), what comments they have made, what content they have liked, what content that they have

uploaded or modified, and what content they have deleted. Audit events contain the user's name, the event type

(viewed, added, edited, deleted), and the exact system time when the event occurred. The audit log is not edition

specific; it exists in all paid editions.

1. Open the  Admin Content Administration  section, ensure that Content Administration has been enabled

(the button at the top of the page should be labeled "Disable Content Administration"), and click the Usage

 Auditing tab.

The Usage Auditing options are displayed.

Figure 26: Performing a usage audit

2. Select either User or Content from the top drop-down menu, and type a search string in the adjacent text box.

Whether you are performing a usage audit on a user or on a piece of content, you must select the person or

content item that you want from the auto-complete drop-down menu for the operation to register the correctobject to audit.

3. Select the period that you want the audit to cover from the View drop-down menu. The options are:

○ All Usage

○ Today

○ Last 7 Days

○ Last 14 Days

○ This Month

○ Last 60 Days

○ Custom

4. If you selected Custom in the preceding step, you must select the Start Date and End Date from the calendar

selectors.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 37

Page 38: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 38/228

5. Click Audit Usage.

The audit is prepared and displayed in the panel below the Usage Auditing options.

Figure 27: Viewing a usage audit

6. To download the usage audit, click Download .csv and use your browser's download handling to save the file to

your hard drive or to open the .csv file in an associated spreadsheet application.

2.5 Configure Email Templates options

The  Admin Email Templates  page allows you to alter the style of email notifications sent from your SAP

Jam instance to SAP Jam users. If it is preferred, you can set separate email templates for internal and external

recipients. You can make and save email template changes without affecting the look of your current emails,

allowing you to preview those changes, and publish them only when your email template changes are satisfactory.

To modify the email template

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Email Templates from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Email Templates  page is displayed.

38 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 39: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 39/228

Figure 28: The Email Templates page (disabled)

2. Select the Enable custom email template checkbox to activate this feature and to enable you to make email

template changes.

A panel is displayed with a pair of tabs and a preview image of the email layout, with two edit boxes.

Figure 29: The Email Templates page (enabled)

The initial section presented to you to edit is the background and page.

3. If necessary, click (Edit) beside Background & Page in the preview image of the email, and make any changes

that you want to the style settings for the Background & Page Design.

You can set any of the following CSS properties for either the Email Background Style or the Page

Background Style:

○ background-color

○ border

○ border-color

○ border-width

○ box-shadow

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 39

Page 40: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 40/228

Note

If you set any CSS options in either of these edit boxes, the default email format will be set to HTML. If you

want your SAP Jam emails to be sent in plain text format, you can only have content in the "plain text" editboxes for the "Page Header", "Page Footer" and email "Footer".

4. Click (Edit) beside Page Header in the preview image of the email, and make any changes that you want in the

Page Header HTML or the Page Header Plain Text edit boxes.

Note

If you set any CSS or HTML options in any edit box, the default email format will be HTML. If you want your

SAP Jam emails to be sent in plain text format, you can only have content in the "plain text" edit boxes for

the "Page Header", "Page Footer" and email "Footer".

5. Similarly, click (Edit) beside any of the follow sections in the preview image:○ Page Footer

○ Footer

Note

Again, if you set any CSS or HTML options in any edit box, the default email format will be HTML. If you

want your SAP Jam emails to be sent in plain text format, you can only have content in the "plain text" edit

boxes for the "Page Header", "Page Footer" and email "Footer".

6. When you have the email template changes set as you want, click Update to save them.

This will not change the look of your SAP Jam system's emails until you click Publish.

To preview your email template changes

1. To preview your changes, ensure that you have saved them by clicking Update.

2. Once your changes have been saved, click Preview.

A Send Email Template dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter the email addresses of those who you want to preview the revised email template into the text box.

Multiple email addresses can be entered by entering them in a comma-separated list.

4. Click Send.Emails are sent to the specified recipients using your email template revisions.

To revert your email template changes

Once you save the changes that you have made to an email template by clicking Update, a notification panel

appears between the Enable custom email template option and the template editing tabs, advising you that "The

template is saved, but is not yet published".

● Click Revert to Published Version if you decide to roll back your saved changes.

The changes will be reverted, and the published email template settings are restored.

40 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 41: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 41/228

To publish your email template changes

● Once you have reviewed your template changes, and you are ready to use them, click Publish, either below the

template editing tabs, or above them.

To configure a different email template for external users

To set a different email template for external users, do the following:

1. Click on the External tab, and deselect the Same settings used for Internal Email Template checkbox.

A preview image of the email layout and editable text boxes will appear in the tab, like those in the Internal tab.

2. Make the changes that you want, just as you did for the Internal template.

3. Save, preview, and publish the changes, just as you did for the Internal template.4. If you decide to return to using the same email template for email to both internal and external users, select

the Same settings used for Internal Email Template checkbox.

The preview image of the email layout and the editable text boxes will disappear in the tab, like those in the

Internal tab.

Note

You must click Publish to enable this change back to using the same template for emails from SAP Jam to

internal and external users.

To disable the use of email templates

● If you decide that you no longer want to use customized email templates, deselect the Enable custom email

template checkbox.

The preview image of the email layout and the editable text boxes will disappear from the page.

Note

You must click Publish to commit to this change back to not using customized email templates.

2.6 Configure the Getting Started Wizard

The  Admin Getting Started Wizard  page allows you to configure whether the getting started wizard will be

used, and what screens are shown to new users.

Note

The pages of the Getting Started Wizard that you can turn on or off, and the one page that you can modify, are

all in the 2-4 user pages of the wizard. There are also ten additional pages that introduce administrators to

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 41

Page 42: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 42/228

some of the key features of SAP Jam administration, but you will only see these pages if you are configured as

an SAP Jam administrator when you first log on. It is therefore important to have new hires who will be working

as administrators configured as administrators when they first log in.

For those who have missed it, here is a list of the wizard's administrator pages.

Table 10: The Getting Started Wizard's administrator pages are:

● Take a quick tour (of the admin

features)

● Settings, alerts, help and more

● Create groups

● Set up a support email

● Set up help and support links

● Apply your company branding

● Establish basic governance

● Customize the Getting Started wiz

ard

● Generate company-wide reports

● Get help from JAM's guides

Configure the getting started wizard

To configure the getting started wizard, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Getting Started Wizard from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Getting Started Wizard  page is displayed.

Figure 30: The Getting Started Wizard configuration page

2. Select Display Getting Started Wizard to enable its use.

Note that:

○ The first two tabs of the Getting Started Wizard—Connect with People and Join Groups—are mandatory

and cannot be modified.

○ The third tab—Go Mobile—is optional, but it cannot be modified.

○ The fourth tab is optional and it can be set to display any message that you want to compose.

3. Optionally, enable Tab 3 or Tab 4 by clicking the switch.

42 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 43: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 43/228

Figure 31: Enable the Getting Started Wizard's 3rd and 4th tabs

A disabled switch has an "x" and a gray background; an enabled switch has a check mark and a blue

background.

4. If you enable Tab 4, click Edit to the right of the title text box for that tab.

The title text box and the message text box become editable.

5. If you enable Tab 4, enter the title that you want for the fourth tab, and enter the content that you want

displayed in the body of the fourth tab.

Figure 32: Message editor for tab 4

In addition to basic text formatting options, you can add hyperlinks, images, or videos to your message.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 43

Page 44: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 44/228

Note

Your content must fit in the dimensions of the wizard, so a visual guide is included in the editor in the form a

translucent overlay that will indicate if you have exceeded the allowed dimensions.

6. Optionally, click Preview to see the wizard in a pop-up dialog box.

To close the dialog box, click on the "X" in its upper-right corner.

7. Once you are satisfied with your configuration of the tabs, click Save.

The new or revised Getting Started Wizard is saved, and it will be displayed to new users when they first log

on.

2.7 Configure a Custom Terms of Service

Note

This feature is only available for companies that are integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7].

The  Admin Custom Terms of Service  page allows you to create a customized Terms of Service agreement

for the users of your organization's SAP Jam service that they will be required to accept the next time that they log

in before they can continue to use your organization's SAP Jam service.

Create a customized Terms of Service agreement

To create a customized Terms of Service agreement, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Custom Terms of Service from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Custom Terms of Service  page is displayed. Either a message stating that "No custom

Terms of Service has been defined for <company_name>" or the current custom Terms of Service agreement

is displayed.

Figure 33: Custom Terms of Service section

2. Click Edit Terms of Service.

A simple HTML editor is displayed, which will either be blank or contain the text of the current custom Terms

of Service agreement notification.

44 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 45: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 45/228

Figure 34: Custom Terms of Service editor

3. Enter the Custom Terms of Service agreement notification and format it as required.

4. When you are satisfied with the document, click Save.

The new or revised Custom Terms of Service notification is saved, and users will be required to accept it the

next time that they log in to your organization's SAP Jam service before they can continue using it.

2.8 Configure an Extranet Terms of Service

Note

This feature is only available for companies that are integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7].

The  Admin Extranet Terms of Service  page allows you to create a customized Terms of Service agreement

specifically for the external users of your organization's SAP Jam service. Once created, your external users will

be required to accept it the next time that they log in before they can continue to use your organization's SAP Jam

service.

To create an Extranet Terms of Service agreement

To create an Extranet Terms of Service agreement, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Extranet Terms of Service from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Extranet Terms of Service  page is displayed. Either a message stating that "No extranet

Terms of Service has been defined for <company_name>" of the current Extranet Terms of Service

agreement is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 45

Page 46: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 46/228

Figure 35: The Extranet Terms of Service section

2. Click Create Extranet Terms of Service.

A simple HTML editor is displayed, which will either be blank or contain the text of the current Extranet Terms

of Service agreement notification.

Figure 36: The Extranet Terms of Service editor

3. Enter the text for the Extranet Terms of Service agreement notification and format as desired.

4. When you are satisfied with the document, click Save.

The new or revised Extranet Terms of Service notification is saved, and your organization's external users will

be required to accept it the next time that they log in to your organization's SAP Jam service before they can

continue using it.

2.9 Configure Kudos options

The  Admin Kudos  page provides a mechanism for publicly recognizing users for their accomplishments,

and as such they are a mechanism for encouraging good working practices and positive personal traits, as well as

helping to establish a positive interpersonal environment within the enterprise social networking provided by SAP

Jam.

There is a default set of eight types of kudos, and there is a mechanism for creating new custom kudos. Kudos can

be disabled and enabled again as required. Also, custom kudos can be edited or deleted.

46 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 47: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 47/228

To manage your organization's use of kudos, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Kudos from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Kudos  page is displayed.

Figure 37: Kudos catalog

2. To create a new custom kudos, click Add a new Custom Kudos.

The Create Custom Kudos page is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 47

Page 48: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 48/228

Figure 38: Create Custom Kudos

1. In the Label field, enter the name or title that you want to give the new kudos.

2. Select the Admins only check box to restrict the awarding of kudos to SAP Jam support or company

administrators only. Deselect the check box to permit all users to award kudos.

3. In the Description text box, provide a description of the purpose of or reason for awarding the kudo, such

as describing the quality for which it is awarded, or the type of accomplishment that it signifies.

4. Click Browse to locate an icon for the kudos on your local drive.

5. Once you have the above three items set to your satisfaction, click Create to save the new custom kudo.

You are returned to the  Admin Kudos  page, where your new custom kudos will be listed in the

Custom Kudos section of the page.

3. To manage kudos:

Figure 39: Manage Kudos

1. To disable an enabled kudos, click Disable on the row for the kudos that you want to disable.

2. To enable a disabled kudos, click Enable on the row for the kudos that you want to enable.

3. To edit a custom kudos, click More on the row for the kudos that you want to edit, and select Edit from the

context menu.

4. To delete a custom kudos, click More on the row for the kudos that you want to delete, and select Delete

from the context menu.

48 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 49: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 49/228

2.10 Configure Security options

Set the SAP Jam security options in the  Admin Security  page.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Security from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Security  section is displayed.

2. In the top section of the Security page, you can set the following options:

Figure 40: General security settings

○ Select Enable RSS to control whether SAP Jam accepts requests to the RSS URLs. SAP Jam Rich Site

Summary (RSS) URLs are secured through obfuscation, are private to each member, and should not be

shared. When disabled, SAP Jam will return an HTTP 403 status message, but no content.

○ Select Require email authentication for new browsers to decrease the possibility of someone gaining

access to a user's SAP Jam account without access to their email account. If this setting is enabled, users

will be sent an email validation each time they log in from a browser or computer that they haven't used

before.

○ Enter a value in the Automatically end a session after a period of inactivity (seconds) field to set the

duration of inactivity before SAP Jam sessions log a user out. For companies signing on through

SuccessFactors Foundation, this setting must be equal to or greater than the SuccessFactors Foundation

timeout setting; otherwise, users will be re-signed in automatically with a new session, thus effectively

turning off automatic log offs.

○ Select Enable SuccessFactors shared session service to ensure that the if the SuccessFactors setting for

maximum session length is used, even if it is shorter than the maximum session length set in SAP Jam.

The converse however is not true. If the SAP Jam timeout is shorter than the SuccessFactors one, and

this setting is enabled, the SAP Jam setting will be enforced for users while in SAP Jam, but if they are still

within the session boundaries set in SuccessFactors, the user would still be able to reach the

SuccessFactors site, and from there they could be automatically logged back into SAP Jam via Single

Sign-On (SSO).

3. In the Password Strength section, you can set the following options:

Figure 41: Password Strength settings

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 49

Page 50: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 50/228

Note

The Password Strength section is only available for companies that are not integrated with SuccessFactors

Foundation [page 7].

4. In the E-Mail Settings options section, you can set the following options:

Figure 42: E-Mail Settings options

○  Allow members to create content via e-mail—Allows users to create and respond to SAP Jam activities

such as new comments to items they previously posted in SAP Jam.

○  Allow SAP Jam to send members content via e-mail—Enables automated email notifications.

5. In the Domains section, you can manage domains by using the controls in this section.

The domains section allows you to control the domains and sub-domains owned by your company that can

access SAP Jam. If your company's SAP Jam instance was created on the primary domain, any sub-domains

will automatically be included in the domain's list. If your company's SAP Jam instance was created in a sub-

domain, you can choose which other sub-domains can access SAP Jam. Also, if your company has additional

domains, you can add them to your SAP Jam instance to allow users from those domains to join.

Note

Your changes are not immediately implemented because the SAP Jam Customer Support team performs a

domain check to verify your ownership of the domain before the domain is activated.

Figure 43: Trusted Domains settings

To add a new trusted domain to SAP Jam perform the following steps:

1. Click Add a New Domain; a new row is added to the list of domains.

2. Type in the new domain name.

3. Press Enter to save the new domain name.

To remove a domain, click Remove on that domain's row.

6. In the IP Restrictions section, select one of the two radio buttons in this section. If you select:

○  Any IP address, then users can log in from any location

50 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 51: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 51/228

○ Only these IP addresses, then users can log in from only the IP addresses within your organization's

network.

Figure 44: IP Restrictions settings (Any IP address)

Note

Limiting access to Only these IP addresses, will not exclude usage of any of the external features of SAP

Jam, such as external groups or inviting external users to group.

If you do select Only these IP addresses, a table is displayed beneath the option in which you can do thefollowing:

○ Enter an out-going IP address (IPv4) or IP address range (CIDR) for your organization in the text box in

the IP Restriction column, and click Save changes to apply your setting.

○ Click Clear in the initial row to delete the contents of the text box in that row.

○ Click Add a new IP Address to add an additional row.

○ Click Remove in any additional rows to remove those rows.

Figure 45: IP Restrictions settings (Only these IP addresses)

7. When you have set these options to your satisfaction, click Save changes.

2.11 Configure Compliance monitoring

The  Admin Compliance  page allows you to configure a pair of "dictionaries" (lists of words) for Compliance

and Profanity against which users' posts and private messages can be scanned for matches with the words in the

dictionaries. The intent is that you will add lists of rude, offensive terms (Profanity) and terms that might indicate

an inappropriate communication (data loss) of sensitive company information (Compliance) in the Dictionary

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 51

Page 52: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 52/228

page. The matching instances are shown in the Pending Flagged Items page, where you can choose to Ignore or

send an Alert email to specified recipients. There is a History page where you can view past matches. The Add

Compliance Email option allows you to set an email address, or email addresses, for the people that are to be

notified when a term in the Compliance and Profanity dictionaries are matched. Also, there is a link to the Reportspage, where you can Download a Compliance Report.

Note

The compliance and profanity alerts need to be turned on in the Features tab before they will work. Content

that has been posted before turning the alerts on will not be scanned or flagged.

Configure the Compliance dictionaries

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Compliance from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Compliance  page is displayed.

2. Click on the Dictionary tab.

The  Admin Compliance Dictionary  tab is displayed.

Figure 46: Compliance: Dictionary

3. In the Dictionary page, you can do the following:

○ Browse through the terms used: The dictionary catalog displays 20 terms per page. By default, these

terms are displayed in alphabetical order, although you can change the sort order of the terms by clicking

on the catalog table headings (Flag, Terms, and Action). Scroll to the bottom of the page and click Next

Page to browser through the full list of terms.

○ Search for a specific term: Near the top of the Dictionary tab, type the term that you are looking for in

the text box and click Search. If the term is currently in either dictionary, the dictionary catalog will display

only that term. If it is not currently in either dictionary, the catalog will not display and the message Noting

to display will be shown instead.

○ Enable or disable terms: If the dictionary contains a term that you no longer want to be checked in scans,

click Disable in the Action column for the row for that term. Click Enable to restore a term to use in scans

of users' posts.

○ Add one or more terms: Click Add Term at the top of the Dictionary tab. The add terms form is displayed.

52 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 53: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 53/228

1. Select the radio button, Compliance or Profanity, for the dictionary that you want to add a term or

terms to.

2. Enter the term or terms (as a comma-separated list; no spaces) that you want to add in the text box.

3. Click Add, or click Cancel to return to the Dictionary tab's terms catalog view.

Figure 47: Compliance: Dictionary, Add Term

Note

The compliance and profanity alerts do not prevent users from posting inappropriate terms, nor do they

send email notifications if users do post inappropriate terms. They only flag instances of users' use of the

terms listed and enabled in the compliance and profanity dictionaries.

Set Compliance email recipients

The Add Compliance Email option allows you to set an email address, or email addresses, that will receive a copy

of each feed event or private message sent to anyone in your company.

Note

Since routing all feed items can generate a massive amount of data, it is recommended that you specify a

dedicated email address for use with this feature.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Compliance from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Compliance  page is displayed.

2. Click Add Compliance Email.

The Compliance Email form is displayed.

Figure 48: The compliance email addresses form

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 53

Page 54: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 54/228

3. Type in the email address or list of addresses (as a comma-separated list; no spaces) that will receive a copy

of each feed event sent to anyone in your company.

4. Click Save to save the email address or list of addresses, or click Cancel to return to the Compliance page.

Note

To remove all email addresses from the Compliance Email configuration, repeat steps 1 and 2, then click Clear

and Save.

Respond to dictionary matches in the Pending Flagged Items page

The Compliance and Profanity alerts monitors the content posted to SAP Jam or sent in private messages and

flags items that contain the profanity or compliance terms listed in the compliance dictionaries.

SAP Jam Administrators can view the list of flagged items and perform the following actions:

● Alert the user and group admin for group content.

● Alert the user and their manager for profile content.

● Ignore the flagged item.

All of these items will remove the alerts from the Pending Flagged Items catalog, but they will remain accessible

from the Compliance History catalog.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Compliance from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Compliance  page is displayed.

Figure 49: Compliance: Pending Flagged Items

2. In the default view, which is the Pending Flagged Items tab, you can do the following:

○ Optionally, you can filter the items shown in the Pending Flagged Items table by selecting an option from

the Show drop-down menus:

○ From the first drop-down menu, the options are All Flags, Compliance, Profanity, or Unscannable.

○ From the second drop-down menu, the options are  Any Date, Today, Within a Week, Within a Month,

or > 1 Month ago.

54 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 55: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 55/228

○ For more information on the user, click the hyper-linked term in the Term column.

A Flagged Item Details dialog box is displayed.

Figure 50: The Flagged Item Details dialog box

Click Close to exit the dialog box.

○ To dismiss a flagged item that is not a problem, select the checkbox on the row for that item and click

Ignore.

The item is removed from the Pending Flagged Items table.

○ To send an alert message, select the check box on the row for that item and click  Alert.

An alert message is sent, and the item is removed from the Pending Flagged Items table.

View History

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Compliance from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Compliance  page is displayed.

2. Click the History tab.

A table, much like the Pending Flagged Items table, is displayed; however, this table shows all previously

flagged items that have been responded to, and the Action column indicates whether they have been set as

Ignored or Alerted.

Download a Compliance Report

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Compliance from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Compliance  page is displayed.

2. Click Download Compliance Report.

The Reports page is displayed, with the report request form set to produce a Compliance Report.

3. Click Request report.

The Compliance Report is scheduled.

4. Navigate away from the page and return to it after a few minutes, and then click Compliance Report in the Title

column of the listed reports in the Reports page.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 55

Page 56: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 56/228

Use your browser's download options to save the report to your hard drive, or to open the report in an

associated application (such as a spreadsheet).

56 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Configuration

Page 57: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 57/228

3 Administration

3.1 Send Invites

Note

This feature is only available for companies that are not integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7].

The  Admin Invites  page provides a mechanism to invite all of your users an invitation to join your SAP Jam

instance.

Figure 51: Invite all employees

● To send all of your users invites to join SAP Jam, click Invite everyone. Emails will be sent to each of your

users with the URL to access your organization's instance of SAP Jam.

● If you add new users, return to the page and click Invite new users. Emails will be sent to each of your users

with the URL to access your organization's instance of SAP Jam.

● If all of your users have received invitations, the  Admin Invites  page will display the message "All your

employees have already been invited."

Figure 52: All of your employees have already been invited

3.2 Users administration

Note

Adding users is either done through the SuccessFactors Platform or with the assistance of SAP Jam

professional services. Contact your SAP Jam representative if you require assistance to add or update the list

of your users or the information about them.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 57

Page 58: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 58/228

The content in this section of the documentation includes:

● About SAP Jam user types permissions [page 58]: This section describes the privileges of the various

SAP Jam user types.

● User privileges administration [page 62]: This section describes how to grant SAP Jam users

administrator status or how to disable user access.

● Create and manage member lists [page 64]: This section describes how to create and manage "member

lists", which are used to define the membership of auto groups, or to define a list of users who will be invited to

use the SAP Jam Mobile app.

● About email notifications [page 67]: This section describes how SAP Jam email notifications work, it

describes the locations where email notifications can be configured, and it lists the email notifications that

SAP Jam can send.

3.2.1 About SAP Jam user types permissions

This section describes the privileges of the various SAP Jam user types.

SAP Jam provides six levels of user privileges:

1. External users, also known as "guest" users, are the most restricted. They are guests of your organization,

given access to only the specific private external groups to which they have been invited, their Home page,

and their User Profile. They are allowed only limited information on, or interactions with, other users. They can

only access the content within the groups to which they have been invited. Also, they require a different,

lower-cost license type than internal users. They are only available on SAP Jam enterprise editions.

2. Restricted access users, are partially restricted users. They have feature and security permissions that limittheir access to only the SAP Jam groups to which they have been invited, and to the content and people that

are in those groups. This is a special case user configuration that is only enabled by making a special request

to your support representative. On request, this user type is provisioned by SAP Jam Support. These users

are managed in the SuccessFactors platform, and they are identified to SAP Jam by having one of the

SuccessFactors platform custom profile fields of user information flagged.

Note

When the SuccessFactors Platform custom field that indicates a "restricted access user" is set, SAP Jam

will recognize and treat the user as such. However, this setting has no effect on the behavior of other

SuccessFactors applications or services, so your organization's administrators must configure equivalent

restrictions in SuccessFactors Platform to restrict the access of your "restricted access users".

3. Full access users typically include all of the employees in your company. They typically have access to all

enabled features except those that are limited to the members of a specific group or that require external

accounts to view, as is the case with integrated business records from external applications.

4. Group administrators are regular users that have created a group or who have been invited to be a group

administrator. Group administrators have special privileges required to perform their function, but "group

administrator" is not a specific user type, so their access is not shown in the following table. The capabilities of

group administrators are fully documented in the SAP Jam Group Administration Guide.

5. Support administrators have access to a sub-set of the functionality available to a Company Administrator.

The role was established to provide Company Administrators with relief of their workload by giving Support

Administrators access to many of the day-to-day duties of SAP Jam administration. This also protects the

stability of the SAP Jam service by limiting access to features that can have great impact on the functionality

58 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 59: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 59/228

of the SAP Jam service to a smaller group of Company Administrators whose main duties are the

configuration and maintenance of SAP Jam.

6. Company Administrators have access to the full range of capabilities within the Admin console. This gives

them the greatest power to change the look, feel, and functions of the SAP Jam service, but it also requiresgreater knowledge of the SAP Jam service, a greater responsibility, and therefore typically a greater focus of

their job duties on configuring and maintaining the SAP Jam service in a manner that suits the needs of your

organization.

SAP Jam User Types and Features Matrix

 

Table 11: User type access to company features

Company features External

users

Restricted

access

users

Full ac

cess users

Support

admins

Company

admins

Company tab and all of its options No No Yes Yes Yes

Customizable company homepage No No Yes Yes Yes

Able to edit the company wiki No No No Yes Yes

Redirect user to the company wiki after login No No No No Yes

 

Table 12: User type access to groups and subgroups features

Groups and subgroups features External

users

Restricted

access

users

Full ac

cess users

Support

admins

Company

admins

Left-nav tab, "My Groups", and "Recent Group Activity" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Recommendation tiles, post to group wall Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Group content moderation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Group administrator No Yes Yes Yes Yes

SuccessFactors homepage tiles No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Invite to a group No Only if a

group ad

min

Yes Yes Yes

Overview page designer No If group

admins

Yes If group

admins

If group

admins

Can create groups, can search for groups No No Yes Yes Yes

Automatically follow business records when you create a

group or feature a business record

No No Yes Yes Yes

Use custom group templates to create groups No No Yes Yes Yes

Create custom group templates No No No Yes Yes

 

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 59

Page 60: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 60/228

Table 13: User type access to content and forums features

Content and forums features External

users

Restricted

access

users

Full ac

cess users

Support

admins

Company

admins

Can create folders Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Use hashtags in content commenting, including photos or

videos

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Forums: ideas, questions and answers Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Forums: discussions Yes, in

group con

text

Yes, in

group con

text

Yes Yes Yes

Wikis, blogs, blog @mentions, documents, photos, videos,

polls, and links

Yes, in

group con

text

Yes, in

group con

text

Yes Yes Yes

Tagging people in photos No No Yes Yes Yes

 

Table 14: User type access to users features

Users features External

users

Restricted

access

users

Full ac

cess users

Support

admins

Company

admins

Bookmarks, content history, user API access

Note: API access can be limited by other factors.

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Upload profile photo, edit profile (basic & contact), status

post editing

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Post group status via email Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ability to add expertise tags No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ability to show/hide expertise tags recommended by SAP

Jam and other users, or tags you yourself have added to

 your profile

No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ability to view others' expertise tags No Limited 1 Yes Yes Yes

Ability to see and endorse other users' expertise tags No Yes, in

group con

text

Yes Yes Yes

See who endorsed you in notifications No Yes 2 Yes Yes Yes

See who endorsed others on their profiles No Yes 2 Yes Yes Yes

First-time login wizard No No Yes Yes Yes

View other users' profiles Yes Limited 3 Yes Yes Yes

Edit profile (office), post status, team usage, member inte

grations

Limited 4 Limited 4 Yes Yes Yes

Modify profile sections No No No Yes Yes

60 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 61: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 61/228

1. Limited to view the expertise of other members of a group or groups that the limited access user is a member

of.

2. If a full access user endorses a "restricted access user", but doesn't share a group with that user, their

endorsement will appear anonymous to the "restricted access user". The "restricted access user's" notification

will indicate that they received an endorsement on an expertise tag, but it won't indicate who gave the

endorsement.

3. Restricted access users can only see the profiles of other users who are members of the groups that they are

also members of.

4. "Yes" for the title, "No" for the first name and last name of external users managed by the SAP ID service.

 

Table 15: User type access to emails, feeds, and notifications features

Emails, feeds, and notifications features External

users

Restricted

access

users

Full ac

cess users

Support

admins

Company

admins

Email notification subscriptions Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Email to update Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Mark as abuse/spam Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

RSS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Feed and feed filters Yes * Yes * Yes * Yes * Yes *

New notifications alerts Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Share feed item Yes, in

group context

Yes, in

group context

Yes Yes Yes

Private messages No No Yes Yes Yes

Chat No No Yes Yes Yes

* Users can generally "like" any visible feed entry, except for those users that do not belong to group that the feed

entry originates from, or for users who are from a different company.

 

Table 16: User type access to tools and utilities features

Tools and utilities features Externalusers

Restrictedaccess

users

Full access users

Supportadmins

Companyadmins

Agenda, timeline, pro/con, ranking, decisions, mentoring Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Calendar events, tasks Yes, in

group con

text

Yes, in

group con

text

Yes Yes Yes

Search Yes, in

group con

text

Yes, in

group con

text

Yes Yes Yes

Kudos No Yes Yes Yes Yes

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 61

Page 62: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 62/228

Tools and utilities features External

users

Restricted

access

users

Full ac

cess users

Support

admins

Company

admins

Admin menus: Content Administration, Users, SAP Jam

mobile app, Custom Profile, Group Templates, Auto

Groups, and Extranet Management

No No No Yes Yes

Admin menus: General, Features, Home page customiza

tion, Branding and Support, Email Templates, Custom

Terms of Service, Extranet Terms of Service, Kudos, Secur

ity, Compliance, Hashtags, Reports, External Applications,

Widget Builders, OpenSearch Clients, OpenSocial Gadgets,

OAuth Clients, SAML Trusted IDPs, SAML Local Identity

Providers, and Gamification

No No No No Yes

Hash tag import No No No No Yes

Admin console access No No No No Yes

Can run company-wide detail reports No No No No Yes

 

Table 17: User type access to integration features

Integration features External

users

Restricted

access

users

Full ac

cess users

Support

admins

Company

admins

View integrated business records from external systems No Limited 1 Based on

external

account

Based on

external

account

Based on

external

account

View integrated CMIS document repository, Business Re

cords

No No Yes Yes Yes

Gamification No No Yes Yes Yes

1. Restricted access users can see data from external applications for which they have valid accounts for which

they have been assigned view permissions.

3.2.2 User privileges administration

This section describes how to grant SAP Jam users administrator status or how to disable user access.

The Users tab in the  Admin Users  page provides allows you:

● To grant administrator privileges to SAP Jam users

● To disable a user account

62 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 63: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 63/228

To grant administrator privileges to SAP Jam users

Note

This feature is only available for companies that are not integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7].

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Users from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Users  page is displayed.

2. In the Users tab, in the row for the user that you want to give administrator status to, click edit.

The user's profile page appears.

Figure 53: Edit Profile: set Administrator Type

3. Click on the Administrator Type drop-down menu, select either the Company Administrator or Support

 Administrator option, and click Save changes.

The user is given the privileges that you indicated, although this may take a little time to propagate

throughout SAP Jam.

To disable a user account

Note

This feature is only available for companies that are not integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7]. If

your instance of SAP Jam is integrated, you must perform this task in SuccessFactors Foundation.

If your SAP Jam service is integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation, then you must disable a user's account in

SuccessFactors Foundation, which will automatically disable that user's access to SAP Jam.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Users from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Users  page is displayed.

2. In the Users tab, in the row for the user that you want to give administrator status to, click edit.

The user's profile page appears.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 63

Page 64: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 64/228

Figure 54: Edit Profile: set Member Status

3. Change the user's Member Status from Active to Alumni and click Save changes.

The selected user's profile is moved into the company's Alumni directory and the user account is deactivated.

Contributions from the user are not removed from SAP Jam when their user account is deactivated.

3.2.3 Create and manage member lists

This section describes how to create and manage "member lists", which are used to define the membership of

auto groups or to define a list of users who will be invited to use the SAP Jam Mobile app, for example.

Member Lists are lists of users that can be used to invite a large number of people to a group, or to manage the

membership of an auto group.

The  Admin Users  page provides the ability to create, edit, publish, or delete member lists, as is described in

the following procedures below.

To create a member list

1. Go to the SAP Jam Admin console and select Users from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Users  page displays.

2. Select the Member Lists tab and click Create New Member List.The Edit Member List page displays.

64 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 65: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 65/228

Figure 55: Create a new Member List

3. Click the auto-generated title (Untitled Member List) and enter a meaningful name for the member list.

4. In the Add People to the Member List text box, build your member list by using one of the following methods:

○ Type a user's name into the Add People to the Member List text box, and—when the person you are

looking for appears in the drop-down auto-completion list—click on their information to add them to the

Pending Members table.

○ Paste in a comma-separated list of email addresses into the  Add People to the Member List text box, and

press Enter to add all of the listed users to the Pending Members table.

○ Type the name of another member list into the Add People to the Member List text box, and press Enter,

and press Enter to add all of the listed users to the Pending Members table.

○ Click Import CSV  to import a comma-separated list of email addresses for members, and use your

browser's upload feature to find and select the file on your hard drive. When the file is uploaded and

processed, the listed users will be added to the Pending Members table.

If you add an unknown email address, it will be placed in the Errors tab. You can save a Member List that has

errors, but you cannot publish it until you have edited and corrected the unrecognized email addresses.

5. To edit or remove users from your Member List, hover over a row of member information in any of the three

listed members tabs (Pending Members, Published Members, or Errors) and/or click the Actions button to see

the actions available for that member. The actions are either Remove (available in all three tabs) or Edit (only

available in the Errors tab.

6. Optionally, click Publish if you are satisfied with the list of members in the list, there are no errors, and you

want to make the member list available for use.

All users are moved into the Published Members tab.

7. Optionally, click Save to retain a list that you are not ready to make available for use.

You are returned to the Member List tab of the  Admin Users  page.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 65

Page 66: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 66/228

Figure 56: Member Lists catalog

The Member Lists shown in the catalog will be shown as being in one of the following Status and Availability

combinations, which will allow you to take the actions listed in the indicated options of the  Actions drop-down

menu:

○ Complete and Published: You can Edit or Delete the list.

○ Complete and Unpublished: You can Edit, Publish Changes, Discard Changes, or Delete the list.

○ Error and either Published or Unpublished: You can Edit, Discard Changes, or Delete the list.

8. In the Edit Member List page you can do the following:

○ To edit a member list

To publish a member list○ To delete a member list

○ To discard an unsaved list, click Discard Changes.

Invite users to a group via a member list

Once Member Lists have been published they are available to be used to invite large numbers of users to a group

all at one time. Simply type the name of the Member List into the "Add People…" text box on the group invite page.

Figure 57: Using Member Lists in invitations

Note

Under the members list for a group, group administrators can filter by alumni users only, click Select All to

select multiple alumni users and then click Remove Alumni to bulk remove those users from the member list.

66 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 67: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 67/228

To use Member Lists in Auto Groups

Auto Groups are groups whose membership is automatically managed based on criteria that are based on userprofile fields. As changes to the user profiles occur, (e.g., a user moves to a different role in another division of the

company), their membership to an Auto Group may be automatically created or revoked, depending on the

criteria set up for that Auto Group's membership. As the list of people in the Member List changes, so will the

membership of all the Auto Groups that use that Member List as a criterion for membership. This allows multiple

Auto Groups to be synchronized with one or more Member Lists.

3.2.4 About notification emails

The SAP Jam notification emails that a user receives are determined by the settings in four configuration pages:three that are available to company administrators, and one that is available to users.

[For administrators] To set whether email notifications are used in your

company

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Security from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Security  page is displayed.

Figure 58: Security E-Mail Settings options

2. In the E-Mail Settings section, select the Allow <your_com pany> Jam to send members content via e-mail to

enable email notifications; deselect this option to disable email notifications.

[For administrators] To set whether your company's users can receive dailyemail alerts and active task reminders

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Features from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Features  page is displayed.

Figure 59: Enable daily alert emails and active task reminders in SAP Jam

2. In the Feature Management section, select the Send daily alert emails to all members option to allow users to

receive the notification emails listed in the Daily Emails section of their  Account Settings Email Settings

page.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 67

Page 68: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 68/228

Disabling this option will prevent users from receiving daily alert emails regardless of any options that they

may have checked in the Daily Emails section of their  Account Settings Email Settings  page.

3. In the Feature Management section, select the Send active task reminder to all members option to allow users

to receive email reminders of their uncompleted tasks.Disabling this option will prevent users from receiving active task reminders regardless of whether they have

checked the Active Tasks Reminder option in the Daily Emails section of their  Account Settings Email

Settings  page.

4. Click Save changes at the bottom of the page.

Your checked selections will be enabled; unchecked options will be disabled.

[For administrators] To prevent a particular user from receiving email

notifications

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Users from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Users  page is displayed.

2. In the table of users, in the row for the user that you want to give administrator status to, click edit.

The user's profile page appears.

3. In the Email Settings section, select the Stop all emails option for All and click Save changes.

Figure 60: Disable a specific user's email notifications in SAP Jam

The default for this option is Enable Emails. Setting the All option to stop all notification emails for the selected

user.

68 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 69: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 69/228

[For users] To select which notification emails they receive

Table 18: User email settings

1. As an SAP Jam user, from the top of any non-Admin con

sole page, click on your name and select Jam Account

Settings, or click on the cog icon and select Account

Settings.

Your Account Settings page is displayed.

2. Click Email.

The Email Settings page is displayed.

3. In the Notifications tab, select or deselect the notification

options that you want enabled or disabled.

To do this, you can:

○ Select or deselect the check box beside each option

○ Select or deselect the check box in each section title,

which will enable or disable all options in that section

4. Once you have selected the notifications that you want to

receive, click Save changes.

Note

Users will receive Daily Email notifications only if the follow

ing five conditions are true:

1. The Allow <your_company> Jam to send members

content via e-mail option is selected in the E-Mail

Settings section of the  Admin Security  page.

2. The Send daily alert emails to all members option in

the  Admin Features  page is selected.

3. The All option in the user's Email Settings section, ac

cessed from the  Admin Users  page by clicking

edit in the row for their account, is set to the default

value of Enable Emails.

4. At least one of the Daily Emails options in the user's

Email Settings page is selected.

5. There is content in the category of the daily summary

option(s) that is (are) enabled. If there is no content,

no daily summary is sent.

Figure 61: User email settings

Note

If a user has never saved changes in the Email Settings page, then the settings displayed might not accurately

reflect the options in use.

User notification emails

The following table lists the notification emails that can be sent to SAP Jam members. Note that this information

is drawn from the SAP Jam User Guide; it is reproduced here to present a more complete description of SAP Jam

notification emails.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 69

Page 70: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 70/228

Table 19: User notification emails

Title Description

High Priority Emails

Direct Messages Sent when a group member enters an @mention ("@User Name") specifically to you.

Direct Messages to All Followers Sent when a group member enters an @@notify to all members of a group of which you

are a member.

Private messages Sent when an SAP Jam user sends you a private message by clicking on the envelope icon

in the top menu bar of any SAP Jam page and clicking New Message.

Notifications New Notifications for you or involving you. This setting controls approximately a dozen

different notification emails. Examples are you have a new follower, and you’ve been

@mentioned from a content item.

Note

Administrators should select this option. They will have some additional notificationemails sent to them if this option is selected: see the next section, Administrator

notification emails for details.

Photo tagging Sent when another user has tagged you in a video posted in an SAP Jam group of which

you are a member.

Video tagging Sent when another user has tagged you in a video posted in an SAP Jam group of which

you are a member.

Error Emails on 3rd party integra

tions

When integrations you’ve set up (for example, with Google Docs or Twitter) are no longer

working correctly.

External Applications When a group you’re in that is integrated with an external system generates a notification

email that the records in that external system have been created, modified, or deleted.

Tasks When a task has been assigned to you, or a task already assigned to you has been up

dated.

Wall posts When someone has posted something on your wall.

Medium Priority Emails

Feed Comments and Likes A colleague has commented on or liked a feed post you’ve made.

First click on my Wikis, Links, or

Documents

A colleague has clicked through for the first time on a wiki, link or document you’ve

posted.

Wiki edit to a page you created A colleague has edited a wiki you created.

Wiki edit only when you were thelast editor

A colleague has edited a wiki for which you were the previous editor.

Daily Emails

Clicks on my content Links that I've posted that other's have clicked.

Reminder for old notifications Inbox notifications older than one day.

Results for tracked items Any new results for saved search terms.

Yesterday's headlines Up to 20 feed events from my follows feed, created by other users, yesterday.

Yesterday's top 5 links Up to 5 most popular links people clicked on yesterday.

Active Tasks Reminder Reminder of uncompleted Tasks that are assigned to you.

70 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 71: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 71/228

Administrator notification emails

The following table lists the notification emails that can be sent to SAP Jam administrators.

Table 20: Administrator notification emails

Title Description

Admin Browser Authentication Re

quest

If the Require email authentication for new browsers option has been selected in the

 Admin Security  page, this notification email is sent on the detection of a browser

being used to access SAP Jam for the first time.

Content pending approval If Content Administration is enabled and a user submits content, this notification requests

that the administrator approve the content. For an administrator to receive this notifica

tion email, he or she must have checkedNotifications in their  Account Settings Email

Settings  page.

Content inappropriate Notifies company administrators that an SAP Jam user has marked some content as be

ing inappropriate. If this occurs, the content is removed, a message that it has been

marked as inappropriate is displayed, and the content is listed in the  Admin Content

 Administration  section's Items Pending Review panel. This will only occur if you have

enabled content administration and the number of reports that the content is inappropri

ate have exceeded the configured threshold. An administrator must review the content,

and either click Delete if you agree that it is inappropriate, or click Restore if you find the

content to be acceptable.

Content inappropriate rejection Notifies the users who reported content as being inappropriate if that content is deemed

to be acceptable and is restored by a company administrator. This notification email is

not received by administrators, but it does report on an administrator action.

Compliance item flagged Notifies company administrators that a comment or private message contains words that

are listed in the profanity or compliance dictionaries as configured in the  Admin

Compliance  section.

Company Storage Space is almost

full

Notifies company administrators when storage used hits 80% of their allocation. If you

receive an "80% usage" notification, you should either free up storage by deleting old

content or contact your SAP Jam Support representative to purchase more storage

space. These notifications will occur daily, are not configurable, and cannot be turned off

except by taking action to resolve the situation.

Company Storage Space IS full Notifies company administrators when storage used hits 100% of their allocation. If you

receive a "100% usage" notification, your users will no longer be able to upload content,

so acting to resolve the problem becomes vital. These notifications will occur daily, are

not configurable, and cannot be turned off except by taking action to resolve the situation.

Admin Report succeeded Notifies the administrator who requested a report that the report generation has com

pleted successfully.

Admin Report ready for download Notifies the administrator who requested a report that the report is ready to be down

loaded.

Admin Report failed Notifies the administrator who requested a report that the report generation failed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 71

Page 72: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 72/228

3.3 Configure the SAP Jam Mobile app

The SAP Jam Mobile app section of the Admin console allows administrators to configure SAP Jam Mobile app

activation and to send invitations to your company's users to use the mobile app.

To configure SAP Jam Mobile app activation:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select SAP Jam Mobile app from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin SAP Jam Mobile app  page is displayed.

72 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 73: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 73/228

Figure 62: SAP Jam mobile app page

2. In the Settings section, select which of the following options you want enabled:

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 73

Page 74: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 74/228

Figure 63: Mobile app activation settings

○ Enable mobile app (enabled by default) If selected, the SAP Jam mobile app is enabled for your

company.

○ Enforce app passcode (disabled by default) Select this option to require all mobile users to enter a

Personal Identification Number (PIN) to open their SAP Jam app on their mobile device.

Optionally, you can also select which app passcode PIN security options you want to require:

○ Disable three or more consecutive numbers Allows a maximum of two ascending or descending

digits (for example, 129076 is acceptable, 123654 is not).

○ Disable three or more repeating numbers Allows a maximum of two repeating digits (for example,

114595 is acceptable, 111459 is not).

○ Allow activation via mobile camera (enabled by default) If selected, users will be able to leverage the

new one-time-use, QR code-based mobile app activation. If not selected, the web page for QR code-based

activation will be disabled and a message informing the user that this feature has been disabled by the

SAP Jam administrator will be displayed.

○ Restrict Activations to Managed Devices Sets a token string that is pushed to the mobile device via

MDM and which is checked upon sign-up and occasionally during use to ensure that your users' devices

are managed by your organization.

Note that the token string can be generated, updated, and deleted by clicking Manage Token, which opens

the Restrict Activations to Managed Devices dialog box.

74 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 75: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 75/228

Figure 64: Restrict Activations to Managed Devices dialog box

3. Click Save changes to implement your selections.

Note

The above changes can take up to three hours to propagate to your users mobile apps.

To invite users in your company to use the SAP Jam Mobile app, do the

following:

1. In the Add People To The Member List text box, begin typing a user's name, their email address, or the name

of a member list, and when the person or members list that you are looking for appears in the drop-down

auto-completion options list, click on the name of that person or member list.

The user or member list that you clicked on will appear in the Invitation List table.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 75

Page 76: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 76/228

Figure 65: SAP Jam mobile app invitations

2. Alternatively, import a list of members in the form of a comma-separated list of email addresses by clicking

Import CSV  and using your browser's upload feature to find and select the file on your hard drive.3. Once you have the list of users that you want to invite to use the SAP Jam Mobile app showing in the Invitation

List, click Send.

The users shown in the Invitation List will be sent an email invitation to use the SAP Jam Mobile app, with

instructions on how to set it up for use on their mobile devices.

3.4 Custom Profile administration

The  Admin Custom Profile  page allows you to configure the profile page for all SAP Jam users in your

company. As a company administrator, you can remove and re-order the profile sections by dragging and

dropping them.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Custom Profile from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Custom Profile  page is displayed.

76 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 77: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 77/228

Figure 66: Customizing Profile pages

2. Select the checkbox beside the profile widgets that you want to have available in your users' profile pages;

deselect them to remove them.

3. Drag any widget box to place it in either section of the widgets (Basic Profile Information or Show Additional

Information) or to set the order in which they appear.

4. Click Edit in the widget box for any of the following widgets to make modifications to that widget type:

1. Click Edit in the Contact Information widget box to select which particular fields—user's phone numbers,

IM addresses, and other options—will be available.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 77

Page 78: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 78/228

Figure 67: Customizing Profile pages: the 'Contact Information' Edit Selection dialog box

○ Select fields to have them available; deselect them to remove them.

○ To add a new field, type the title in the "Add a New Field" text box.

Note

The data for any field that you set must be available, and the name of that field must correspond to

data that is present in the user's information. See the Automatic user provisioning table in the SAP

Jam integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7] section.

○ To remove an added custom field, click the "X" to the right of that field's information.When you have made the changes that you want in the Edit Section dialog box, click Save to return to the

Custom Profile page.

2. Click Edit in the Job Information widget box to select which particular fields—such as the users' job title,

start date, and other options—will be available.

78 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 79: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 79/228

Figure 68: Customizing Profile pages: 'Job Information' Edit Selection dialog box

○ Select fields to have them available; deselect them to remove them.

○ To add a new field, type the title in the "Add a New Field" text box.

Note

The data for any field that you set must be available, and the name of that field must correspond to

data that is present in the user's information. See the Automatic user provisioning table in the SAP

Jam integrated with SuccessFactors Foundation [page 7] section.

○ To remove an added custom field, click the "X" to the right of that field's information.

When you have made the changes that you want in the Edit Section dialog box, click Save to return to the

Custom Profile page.

3. OpenSocial Gadgets: Enable this option to show a configured OpenSocial Gadget in users' profiles.

Figure 69: Customizing Profile pages: custom profile Edit Selection dialog box

Note that OpenSocial Gadgets must have been previously configured, as described in the OpenSocial

Gadgets section of the SAP Jam Developer Guide.

When you have made the changes that you want in the Edit Section dialog box, click Save to return to the

Custom Profile page.

5. When you are satisfied with your arrangement of the content to be shown in your organization's users

profiles, click Save changes.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 79

Page 80: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 80/228

3.5 Group templates administration

SAP Jam group templates are a mechanism for replicating group content quickly and consistently. In addition to

the set of pre-built templates that are available as a default set of "system group templates", SAP Jam supports

the creation of "custom group templates" that can be optimized to meet your organization's business needs and

requirements. Both system group templates and custom group templates can be made visible to, or hidden from,

your users. Your organization's users can create new groups based on any visible templates, whether they are

system or custom templates.

Manage group templates

1. Go to the SAP Jam Admin console and select Group Templates from the left side navigation.

The  Admin Group Templates  page displays, showing a catalog of group templates.

Figure 70: Creating a group: template selection

The catalog lists all group templates available to your organization. They are displayed alphabetically in two

groupings. The first grouping lists system templates, which are indicated with the label Pre-built Template

underneath the templates name. The second groups lists any custom templates that have been created for

80 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 81: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 81/228

your organization, which are indicated by the company or support administrator's name that created them

underneath the template name. Every template has a visibility toggle in the first column and an  Actions button

in the last column. A custom template also displays the date and the administrator by whom it was last

modified. The list is searchable using the search box on the top right.2. To create a custom group template, do the following:

1. Click Create a template near the top left of the page.

The Create Template dialog box is displayed.

Figure 71: Create Template dialog box

2. Set in the following options:

○ Name: [Required] The template name does not need to be unique in the catalog.

○ Description: [Optional] Helps an end user understand the purpose of the template.

○ Language: [Optional] Defaults to "All Languages". The language the template is written in. By

specifying a language, end users will see the template at group-creation time only if it matches their

individual preferred language/locale. By not specifying a language, the template is always visible at

group-creation time.

○ Business Records: [Optional] By specifying a business object type, it means the template is purpose-

built for that type. The template is available to an end user only when they create a group based on a

business object instance of that type. As an example, you can select a custom "ACE Sales

opportunity methodology" template only when you create a new group based on an opportunity

business object type from SAP CRM.

3. Click Create.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 81

Page 82: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 82/228

The <template_name> (Group Template) page is displayed, from which you can do the following:

Figure 72: <template_name> (Group Template) page

○ Click Group Admin settings to edit the group options.○ Click Create An Overview Page to use the page designer to create the overview page.

See "Page designer" in the SAP Jam User Guide.

Note

Remember that a custom template can also be created by saving an existing group as a template.

3. To manage the visibility of a group template, click the visibility toggle in the first column of the Group

Templates catalog.

○ A blue "check mark" switch position indicates a visible group template.

○ A grey "x" switch position indicates a hidden group template, not available to users.

A template must be set to visible (published) before it can be used by the organization end users. All pre-built

templates are set to visible by default, while all newly-created custom templates are not visible by default. An

administrator can toggle the visibility of any template at any time in the template catalog to customize what

end users see in the template selection list at group creation time. The maximum number of custom

templates that can be set to visible at any given time can vary.

4. The Actions menu options are:

82 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 83: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 83/228

Figure 73: Actions menu options

Note that the options available vary according to the type of group template (system or custom) and whether

the group template is set to be visible or hidden. The options are:

○ Preview: Displays a preview of the group.

○ Edit: Opens the template in the <template_name> (Group Template) page for editing.

○ Properties: Shows the options set in the Create Template dialog box.

○ Copy: Opens a Copy Template dialog box, which is nearly identical to the Create Template dialog box,

allowing you to set a new name, description, language choice, and business record options for a copy of

the group template that is otherwise identical to the source group template.

○ Create a Group: Opens the Create a Group dialog box.

Note that you can add the following placeholder items to a template:

○ Overview: create one or more overview pages for the template. Add text, images, and dynamic

widgets (see section on overview page designer on how to create overview pages).

○ Content: upload documents, photos, videos, or create wikis, business decision tools, folders, and

private folders. You can copy and move content items within the template.

○ Forums: add forum topics.

○ Links: add links.

There are certain items that cannot be added to a template, such as feed updates, recommendations,

calendar events, tasks, and reports. Therefore, the corresponding sections on the left hand pane are

intentionally disabled when designing a template. If Content and Forum are toggled off for this template

(see section on Specify a Template's Default Group Behavior on how to do this), the sections will be

hidden on the left hand pane.

All changes to a template are saved automatically.

○ Export: Creates a ZIP archive of the group template and opens your browser's download dialog box,

allowing you to save the exported group template.

Note

The export/import functionality is not designed for long-term/permanent, offline storage of custom

templates. You may need to re-export and re-import a custom template in event there is a non-

backwards compatible format, due to ongoing changes or improvements to templates made by the

SAP Jam team.

Caution: Do not delete a custom template from the source environment until it is successfully imported

into the target environment.

○ Delete: Opens a confirmation dialog box, providing you with the option to proceed with, or cancel, the

deletion of the group template. Only templates that are set to invisible can be deleted. Warning: template

deletion is permanent. It does not go into the personal Trash and is therefore non-recoverable.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 83

Page 84: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 84/228

5. To import a custom template, access the template catalog in the target company under Admin > Group

Templates. Click Import a template, locate the zip file on your hard drive, and click Upload.

An email notification is sent to the administrator performing the import when the process is complete at a

later time. Any processing errors are noted in the email.

3.6 Create an auto group

Administrators can create groups in which their members are automatically added based on a number of set

criteria during auto group creation. During auto group creation, administrators::

1. Set up the group2. Add content and general members

3. Activate the group

Note

Only SAP Jam company administrators can create auto-groups.

In addition to the regular SAP Jam group setup options, auto groups also have an option to specify membership.

The Membership tab lets you setup auto groups based on the following profile criteria:

● All employees

● Country

● State

● City

● Location

● ZIP code

● Department

● Division

● Has Direct Report

● Hire Date

● Job Code

● 15 customizable fields

You can also add individual members to your Auto Group by listing individual email addresses.

Alternatively, you can set Auto Groups to use member lists as membership criteria. This is described in more

detail below.

Note

Group members are automatically included and cannot choose to opt out.

1. Go to the SAP Jam Admin console and select Auto Groups from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Auto Groups  page displays, showing a list of the existing auto groups.

84 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 85: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 85/228

Figure 74: Existing Auto Groups catalog

2. Click Create a Group.

The Create an Auto Group page is displays, with the initial Generaltab showing.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 85

Page 86: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 86/228

Figure 75: Create an Auto Group: General tab

○ Choose a group template from the list.

Group templates contain an overview page as well as placeholder content and group structure including

discussion forums that help you quickly set up a group that’s optimized to address specific business

scenarios. For more information, see "About group templates" in the Group Administration Guide.

○ Enter a name for your group.

Use a name that would help users distinguish your group form others. Click Check Group Name to see if

there are other names that are similar to yours.

○ Enter a description for your group.

The description captures the group's objectives and helps to inform and attract other people who might

be interested.

○ Select a Group Type for your group.

There are three type of groups to select from:

○ Public Internal Group - A group that anyone in your company can join, view, and edit.

○ Private Internal Group - A group where members must be explicitly invited in order to view or post

group items. This group can only be edited by a group administrator and the group name can only be

seen by invited members.

86 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 87: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 87/228

○ Private External Group - Note: cannot be used for auto groups. A group that lets you communicate

with members of different companies in a private, invitation only space. This group can only be edited

by administrators.

Note

The group type cannot be changed after the group has been created.

○ In the Invite Members section, select Auto-Group to assign members to the group based on membership

criteria set in the Membership tab.

3.  [Optional] Click the Setup tab and add the following information for your group:

Figure 76: Create an Auto Group: Setup tab

○ Terms of Use: Create a user agreement that all group members will see on their first visit to the group.

○  Announcement: Create a welcome message that all group members will see on their first visit to thegroup.

○ Photo: Upload a group picture to be displayed on the group's main page. The maximum size for a group

image is 110 x 110 px.

○ Overview Page as landing page: If you have created an overview page, you can choose to make it your

group's landing page. When this option is selected, the "Overview" page will be the first thing users see

each time they enter the group. This can be very helpful if your group has regularly updated goals, a

running task list or any group-related information that gets updated frequently. If you don't select this

option group members will see the "Overview" page on their first visit after the page has been created and

the group's feed wall on subsequent visits.

4.  [Optional] Click the Participation tab and select from the following options:

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 87

Page 88: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 88/228

Figure 77: Create an Auto Group: Participation tab

○ Participation:

○ Collaboration Level controls who can share and collaborate on content. The options are as described

in the page:

○ Read-only: Group Admins can share content. All users can view and download content. Chat,

Discussions, Polls and Tasks are off.○ Limited: Group Admins can share content. All users can view and add comments on content.

○ Full: All users can create and collaborate on group content. The Group Admin can customize the

upload policy.

○ Upload policy If you choose the full participation setting, you can restrict the upload policy according

to your needs:

○  All Members: all members of your company can upload new content items. This applies to public

groups only.

○  All Group Members: all members of the group can upload new content items.

○ Only Group Admins: only group admins can upload new content items. All group members are

allowed to comment or edit content.

88 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 89: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 89/228

○ Moderation Policy: If selected, this option requires group administrator approval before contributed

content is displayed to members.

○ Task Policy controls who can update tasks. The options are as described in the page:

○ Read-only: Assignees can update their own task status. Non-assignees can view tasks only.

○ Limited: All users can update the status of any task. Non-assigneers can also view, but not

update, other task details.

○ Full: All users can edit the details for any task.

Note

Tasks can always be edited by group administrators and the task creators.

○ Enable Content Rating: If selected, this option allows users to rate group content items.

5. In the Membership tab, set how members are added to the group by selecting one of the follow options:

Figure 78: Create an Auto Group: Membership tab

○ If you select Add members by their profile attributes, add a criterion or a combination of criteria from the

 Add drop-down menu. For example, you can add a Hire Date range along with the additional criterion of

only employees in the Professional Services Department. Add email addresses of members that don't fit

the criteria. You can also make them group admins by checking the Make Group Admin checkbox.

Figure 79: Membership tab: Add by profile attributes

○ If you select Add members using member lists, use one or more member lists as membership criteria. As

the members in the member lists change, so do the memberships of the Auto Groups that use those

member lists as membership criteria. You can also group admins from the member lists used as

membership criteria.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 89

Page 90: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 90/228

Figure 80: Membership tab: Add by member lists

Note

As you set the membership options, you can click Update Member Count at any time to see how many

members your selections include.

6. When you have set all the options for the Auto Group to your satisfaction, click Create a Group at the bottom

of the page.Auto Groups are set up as inactive to allow for initial structure and content setup. Only Group Admins have

access to inactive groups.

7. In the Auto Groups list, click Activate next to your new group to put the group into use.

3.7 Hashtags administration

Hashtags provide a form of auto-completion for user text entry in wikis. You either create a CSV file, with only one

entry per line, of the words or phrases that users can use the hashtag autocompletion with. In the editors in SAP

Jam that support hashtag use, the user begins writing the word or phrase in the hashtag field, and as soon as they

have typed enough for a unique match, the word or phrase is shown in the hashtag field. The user can then elect to

add this term to the end of the text that they are writing.

To configure hashtags, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Hashtags from the left navigation sidebar to view general

information on your SAP Jam service.

The  Admin Hashtags  page is displayed.

Figure 81: Adding Hashtags

2. If you want to use a hashtags file that you have on your local drive, click Browse, navigate to the file, select it,

and then click Submit.

3. If you want to use a hashtags file provided by SuccessFactors Foundation, click Import and select the file from

the SuccessFactors Foundation hashfiles that are listed.

90 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 91: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 91/228

3.8 Overview of extranet administration

In SAP Jam terms, extranet administration involves the configuration and management of external users and the

SAP Jam features that affect those external users' experience of SAP Jam. The location of the configuration

settings for these features is a bit scattered throughout the Admin console's interface, so this section provides an

overview of the various locations and procedures that relate to extranet administration.

The default number of licensed external users is 100, although your organization can buy more at any time. To

find out how many external user licenses your organization has purchased, and how many external user licenses

are currently being used, please View your SAP Jam service General information [page 15].

You can do the things described in the following sections to manage your extranet users and their experience of

SAP Jam.

Manage extranet domains

To make external logins more secure, you can set either a whitelist or a blacklist of email domains from which

external users can log in to SAP Jam. For information, see the "Domain Management" section in Extranet

Management [page 92].

Manage extranet users

You can view a list of current and invited external users, see their status as external users, and Disable, Block, or

Enable their access individually. For information, see the "Extranet users management" section of Extranet

Management [page 92].

Set the Extranet Log-On Introductory Text

When users are invited to External Groups, they receive a link to the Extranet log-in page. The login page, are

presents external users with an introductory message. You can set the text of this message and the language or

languages that it, or they, will be displayed in. For information, see step 6 in the procedure Configure SAP Jam

Branding and Support options [page 27].

Set the log-on background image and the help page for extranet users

You can set the background image shown in the login page for external users, and you can set whether they can

view a custom help page. For information, see step 7 in the procedure Configure SAP Jam Branding and Support

options [page 27].

Set a customized Terms of Service agreement for your extranet users

You can set whether external users will be shown a "Terms of Service" agreement when they log in for the firsttime, and you can set the text of the terms of service agreement. For information, see the procedure Configure an

Extranet Terms of Service [page 45].

Invite external users to an external group

To have external users access your organization's SAP Jam service, you can send them invitations to join one of

your organization's external groups. For information on how to do this, see the procedure "Invite external

participants to a group" in the "Users and groups" section of the SAP Jam Group Administration Guide.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 91

Page 92: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 92/228

3.9 Extranet Management

Domain Management

To make external logins more secure, you can set either a whitelist or a blacklist of email domains from which

external users can or cannot log in to your company's instance of SAP Jam.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Extranet Management from the left navigation sidebar to view

general information on your SAP Jam service.

The  Admin Extranet Management  page is displayed.

Figure 82: Domain Management

2. In the Domain Management section, click the radio button for the type of list that you want to use.

○ Select Use a blacklist if you want users from all email domains to be able to connect, except those that

you add to the text box.

This is a less secure option, but it will likely require much less work to maintain.

○ Select Use a whitelist if you want users to be able to connect only if they have email addresses with

domains that match those that you add to the text box.

This is a more secure option, but you may have to make frequent changes whenever your organization

collaborates with different external companies.

3. Add a space-separated list of email domains that you want to use as your whitelist or blacklist.4. Click Save changes to enable the options that you have set.

The email domains that you added are shown as a catalog on table format between the text box and and Save

changes button.

5. Optionally, to remove a domain entry, select the checkbox beside the domain entry in the domains catalog

that you want to remove, and click Save changes.

The domain entry is removed from the domains catalog.

92 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 93: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 93/228

Extranet users management

You can view a list of current and invited external users, see their status as external users, and Disable, Block, orEnable their access individually.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Extranet Management from the left navigation sidebar to view

general information on your SAP Jam service.

The  Admin Extranet Management  page is displayed.

2. In the Extranet Users section, click the Show drop-down menu, and select the type of users that you want to

view.

Figure 83: Extranet Users

The options are All, Active, Unaccepted Invites, Blocked Extranet, and Disabled. Note that the drop-down

menu options show the number of users of each type so that you can avoid choosing to view an empty

catalog.

The Extranet Users catalog refreshes after a few seconds and displays the category of users that youselected.

3. To change a user's access:

○ To disable an "Extranet" user, select the checkbox beside their Email entry and click Disable Users.

○ To block an "External Companies" user, select the checkbox beside their Email entry and click Block

Users.

○ To enable an "Disabled" user, select the checkbox beside their Email entry and click Enable Users.

4. Optionally, click the "edit" link in the status column for any user.

The user's Edit Profile page is displayed, where you can edit and save their profile information.

5. Optionally, click the "Review Usage link in the status column for any user.

The Content Administration page is displayed, with the Audit Usage tab activated, where you can view the

user's activities in SAP Jam.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 93

Page 94: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 94/228

3.10 Company administrator Reports

SAP Jam reports display information on many aspects of SAP Jam usage, including adoption metrics such as user

information, user contribution and consumption activity, and disk usage statistics. SAP Jam Reports can be

downloaded as CSV files from the Reports tab. Most reports are available to Group Administrators for group-

specific data.

Note

Report time frames span a maximum of three months at a time. For example, if you wish to view results for a

particular report from January 1, 2014 to May 31, 2014, you would have to generate two reports. The first report

would have a date range of January 1, 2014 to March 31, 2014, and the second report would span April 1, 2014

to May 31, 2014.

To run a report

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Reports from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Reports  page is displayed.

Figure 84: Company administrator Reports options

2. Select the options for the report that you want to run:

○ Users: Select either This Company or Guest Users.

○ Select Report: Select the type of report that you want to run.

The report types, and in some cases the report parameters, that are available are described below.

○ Time Frame: Click on the Start Date and End Date fields or calendar icons to select the beginning and

ending dates, respectively, for the period to be covered by your report from the pop-up calendar selector

widgets. As per the note at the start of this topic, the maximum date range spans no more than three

months.

○ Group: Select either All Company or any of the groups that have been created in your company.

94 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 95: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 95/228

○ Show metadata: Select this option to include report headings indicating the report name and the settings

used for the report (such as the time frame and the group or groups covered).

3. Once you have set the parameters for the report that you want to run, click Request report.

The report is queued to be run. Your report will be run almost immediately, unless there are multiple reportsscheduled (queued). Some reports with large amounts of data to process, such as the Group Activity Report,

can take up to about an hour to run.

Queued and completed reports will be listed in the table below the report options section of the page. These

queued and completed reports are visible to all administrators.

4. To download your report, click the name of your report in the table below the report options section of the

page, which will open your browser's download options dialog box.

It may be necessary to reload the page in your browser to see the results of a recently run report.

For details on the reports that are available to SAP Jam Administrators, see the following descriptions:

● Activity Summary by Month or Week report details [page 108]

Company User Detail Report details [page 97]● Content Consumption by Week or Month report details [page 95]

● Contribution Report by Object by Week or Month report details [page 99]

● Engagement Report details [page 101]

● Expertise Report details [page 101]

● Group Activity Report details [page 102]

● Group Member Activity Report details [page 103]

● Group Template Activity Report details [page 104]

● Kudos Detail report details [page 105]

● Mobile Activation Report details [page 106]

● Terms of Service Compliance Report details [page 107]

● Top Disk Usage per Group or per User report details [page 107]

● User Activity Report details [page 109]

● User Consumption by Week or Month report details [page 110]

● User Contribution by Week or Month report details [page 100]

Note

If users copy or move content between groups, this will affect the counts of their activities in reports. For

example, a moved document will no longer be counted in the original group, but it will be counted in the new

group in which it is located, while a copied document will be counted in both groups.

3.10.1 Activity Summary by Month or Week report details

These reports show information on each content creation activity, with one column per week or month in the time

period selected.

Report options

The options that are available when these report types are selected are:

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 95

Page 96: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 96/228

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Time Frame (Start Date and End Date): The calendar-selected start and end points for the reporting period.

● Group: Whether to report on all groups, or the selected specific group.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Shows a column per week or month in the time period selected, as well as a total for the time frame selected, with

a row for each of the following content creation activities:

● Blogs: The number of blogs created in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

● Chats: The number of chat posts added in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

● Comments: The number of comments made in the week/month, not counting those in Discussions or Ideas,

as well as a total for the entire period.

● Discussion Comments: The number of comments made in discussions in each week/month, as well as a

total for the entire period.

● Discussions Created: The number of discussions created in each week/month, as well as a total for the entire

period.

● Document Annotations: The number of documents annotated in each week/month, as well as a total for the

entire period.

● Documents: The number of documents uploaded in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

● Groups Created: The number of groups created in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

● Idea Comments: The number of comments made in the week/month on ideas, as well as a total for the entire

period.

● Ideas Created: The number of ideas created in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

● Kudos Sent: The number of kudos sent in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

● Links: The number of links added in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

● New Members: The number of new group members in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire

period.

● Nudges Sent: The number of nudges sent in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

● Photo Annotations: The number of photo annotation added in the week/month, as well as a total for the

entire period.

● Photos: The number of photos uploaded in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.● Poll Votes: The number of poll votes cast in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

● Polls: The number of polls created in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

● Questions Answered: The number of answers to questions added in the week/month, as well as a total for

the entire period.

● Questions Created: The number of questions created in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire

period.

● Status Updates: The number of status updates made in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire

period.

● Tasks Created: The number of tasks created in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

● Videos: The number of videos created in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

● Wiki Pages: The number of wiki pages created in the week/month, as well as a total for the entire period.

96 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 97: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 97/228

3.10.2 Company Settings Changes report details

This report shows each company configuration change that has occurred in the specified time period.

Report options

The options that are available when this report type is selected are:

● Time Frame (Start Date and End Date): The calendar-selected start and end points for the reporting period.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Shows a row for each company configuration change that has occurred in the specified time period with the

following columns of information:

● First Name: The first name of the member who made the configuration change.

● Last Name: The last name of the member who made the configuration change.

● Email Address: The email address of the member who made the configuration change.

● User ID: The log-in ID of the member who made the configuration change.

● Date: The date and time that the configuration change was made.

● Setting: The configuration setting that was changed.

● Original Value: The value of the setting prior to the change.

● New Value: The value of the setting after the change.

● Action: Whether the setting was enabled or disabled (Enable or Disable).

3.10.3 Company User Detail Report details

This report shows information on each user with access to SAP Jam.

Report options

The options that are available when this report type is selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 97

Page 98: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 98/228

Report details

Shows a row for each user with the following columns of information:● User ID: The user's SAP Jam ID.

● First Name: The user's first name.

● Last Name: The user's last name.

● Title: The user's title.

● Email Address: The user's email address.

● Country: The user's country of residence.

● Joined?: Whether or not the user has logged in to SAP Jam.

● First Login At: The date and time that the user first logged in at.

● Disabled At: The date and time that the user was disabled at, if they were disabled.

Last Login At: The date and time that the user last logged in at.● Administrator Type: The user's member type (User, Support Administrator, or Company Administrator).

● Status: The user's member status (New, Pending, Active, or Alumni).

● Invited By: A semi-colon separated list of the users that invited this user to join SAP Jam.

3.10.4 Compliance report details

This report shows information on each outstanding violation (match of terms listed in the compliance and

profanity dictionaries) of the compliance rules.

Report options

The options that are available when this report type is selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Shows a row for each violation of the profanity and compliance dictionaries:

● Flag: The dictionary type in which the match occurred (compliance or profanity).

● Term: The full text of the dictionary entry that was matched.

● Type: The content type in which the violation occurred.

● Date: The date and time that the violation occurred.

● Email Address: The email address of the user who committed the violation.

● Name: The full name (first and last) of the user who committed the violation.

98 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 99: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 99/228

● Action: The action taken in response to the flag: "Ignored", "Alerted", or null.

3.10.5 Content Views Report by Week or Month details

These reports show information on each content type in the selected time frame, for the selected group or for all

groups.

Report options

The options that are available when these report types are selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Time Frame (Start Date and End Date): The calendar-selected start and end points for the reporting period.

● Group: Whether to report on all groups, or the selected specific group.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Shows a column for each week or month in the selected time frame, with rows of views counts for each of the

following content types:

● Blogs: The views of blogs in the indicated week/month, as well as the total views for the entire period.

● Discussions: The views of discussions in the indicated week/month, as well as the total views for the entire

period.

● Documents: The views of documents in the indicated week/month, as well as the total views for the entire

period.

● Ideas: The views of ideas in the indicated week/month, as well as the total views for the entire period.

● Links: The views of links in the indicated week/month, as well as the total views for the entire period.

● Photos: The views of photos in the indicated week/month, as well as the total views for the entire period.

● Questions: The views of questions in the indicated week/month, as well as the total views for the entireperiod.

● Videos: The views of videos in the indicated week/month, as well as the total views for the entire period.

● Wiki Pages: The views of wiki pages in the indicated week/month, as well as the total views for the entire

period.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 99

Page 100: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 100/228

3.10.6 Contribution Report by Object by Week or Month reportdetails

These reports shows aggregated counts for each type of activity in the selected group or groups in the selected

period of time.

Report options

The options that are available when these report types are selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

●Time Frame (Start Date and End Date): The calendar-selected start and end points for the reporting period.

● Group: Whether to report on all groups, or the selected specific group.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Shows columns for each week or month in the selected period, as well as the Total Contribution for the entire

selected period.

Shows a row for each of the following activities:

● Blogs: The number of blogs created or edited.

● Chats: The number of chats participated in.

● Comments: The number of comments made.

● Discussions: The number of discussions created or added to.

● Documents: The number of documents uploaded.

● Expertise Added: The number of expertise entries made.

● Expertise Endorsed: The number of expertise endorsements made.

● Ideas: The number of ideas added.

Questions: The number of questions asked.● Kudos Sent: The number of kudos awarded.

● Links: The number of links added.

● Photos: The number of photos uploaded.

● Polls: The number of polls created.

● Poll Votes: The number of poll votes cast.

● Status Updates: The number of status updates made.

● Tasks: The number of tasks assigned.

● Events: The number of calendar events created.

● Tags: The number of tags applied.

● Videos: The number of videos added.

● Wikis: The number of wikis created.

100 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 101: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 101/228

● Groups Created: The number of groups created.

3.10.7 Engagement Report details

This report shows information on each active user in the company, with metrics for tracking user engagement.

Report options

The options that are available when this report type is selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Shows a row for each user with the following columns of information:

● User ID: The user's SAP SAP Jam.

● Email Address: The user's email address.

● First Name: The user's first name.

● Last Name: The user's last name.

● Number of Followers: The user's number of followers.

● Number of People Following: The number of people that the user is following.

● Number of Groups Following: The number of groups that the user is following (is a member of).

● Number of Groups where the user is the Admin: The number of groups for which the user is an

Administrator.

● Number of Wiki Pages Following: The number of wiki pages that the user is following.

● Number of Tasks Assigned: The number of tasks that the user has been assigned.

● Number of Tasks Following: The number of tasks that the user is following.

3.10.8 Expertise Report details

This report shows information on each user who has defined an expertise, with details on their listed areas of

expertise.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 101

Page 102: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 102/228

Report options

The options that are available when this report type is selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Shows a row for each user who has defined an expertise with the following columns of information:

● User ID: The user's SAP Jam ID.

● Email Address: The user's email address.

● First Name: The user's first name.

● Last Name: The user's last name.

● Expertise: A comma-separated list of the user's areas of expertise.

Note

If the user has entered these areas of expertise at different times, they will appear as separate entries in

the report.

● Visible: Whether the user's areas of expertise are set as visible to other users, yes or no.

● Endorsements: The total count of the user's endorsements.

3.10.9 Group Activity Report details

This report shows information on each group in your company's instance of SAP Jam, with counts of the activity

within the listed groups.

Report options

The options that are available when these report types are selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

102 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 103: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 103/228

Report details

Shows a row for each group in your company's instance of SAP Jam with the following columns of information:● Group ID: The numeric ID for the group within SAP Jam.

● Group Name: The name of the group.

Note

Non-Public groups will not show the group name unless Include Private Group Details is enabled in the

Features tab of the SAP Jam Administration console.

● Group Type: The group type can be "Private", "Private Folder", "Cross Company", or "Public".

● Group Creator email address: The email address of the user that created the group.

● Number of Members: The current number of users that are members of the group.

● Created Date: The date and time that the group was created.

● Number of Activities in the last 30 days: A count of activity events in the group in the last 30 days.

● Date of Last post: The date and time of the last post event in the group.

● Cross Company Domains: A comma-separated list of the company domains in which the group is visible.

● Membership: The membership type for the group.

● Participation Setting: The participation setting for this group, which can be "Expert", "Full", "Info", or

"Participation Setting".

● Page Views in the last 30 days: A count of the number of views of pages in this group in the last 30 days.

● # Unique Members Visited in the last 30 days: A count of the number of unique members who visited the

group in the last 30 days.

3.10.10 Group Member Activity Report details

This report shows information on each group member in the specified group and the member's activities in the

group.

Report options

The options that are available when this report type is selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Group: Whether to report on all groups, or the selected specific group.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 103

Page 104: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 104/228

Report details

Shows a row for each group member with the following columns with the following columns of information:● Group ID: The numeric ID for the group within SAP Jam.

● Group Name: The name of the group.

Note

Non-Public groups will not show the group name unless Include Private Group Details is enabled in the

Features tab of the SAP Jam Administration console.

● Group Type: The group type can be "Private", "Private Folder", "Cross Company", or "Public".

● Status: Whether the group is "Active", "Inactive", or "Deleted".

● User ID: The user's username.

● Email Address: The user's email address.

● First Name: The user's first name.

● Last Name: The user's last name.

● User Status: Whether the user is "Active" or an "Alumni".

● Number of Activities in the last 30 days: A count of the user's activities in the last 30 days in the specified

group.

● Date of Last post: The date and time of the user's last activity.

● Total number of Activities: A count of the user's activities in the specified group since it's creation.

● Group Admin: Whether the user is the group's administrator, Yes or No.

3.10.11 Group Template Activity Report details

This report shows information on each template listed, with one row for each template used in the specified time

period.

Report options

The options that are available when this report type is selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Time Frame (Start Date and End Date): The calendar-selected start and end points for the reporting period.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

104 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 105: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 105/228

Report details

Shows a row for each template used in the specified time period with the following columns of information:● Template ID: The numeric ID for the template within SAP Jam.

● Template Type: The type of the group template, which can be "Group Template" or "Custom Group

Template".

● Template Name: The name of the group template.

● Language: The language in which each group based on the template is in.

● Creator: The email address of the user who created the template. This is only shown for "Custom Group

Template" types.

● Create Date: The date that the template was created. This is only shown for "Custom Group Template" types.

● Last Modified: The date and time at which the template was more recently changed. This is only shown for

"Custom Group Template" types.

● Business Record Dependency: If the template has a business record dependency, the name of the business

record type that is shown in the form "<external_application_name> > <business_record_type>"; for

example, CRM>Corporate Account.

● Visible/Invisible: Whether the template has been configured to be visible to users. This is only shown for

"Custom Group Template" types.

● Consumption: The number of groups that have been created from this template.

3.10.12 Kudos Detail report details

This report shows information on each kudos awarded in the specified reporting period.

Report options

The options that are available when this report type is selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Time Frame (Start Date and End Date): The calendar-selected start and end points for the reporting period.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Shows a row for each user with the following columns with the following columns of information:

● Kudos Type: The name of the kudos type.

● To: Email Address: The email address of the recipient of the kudos.

● Date Sent: The date that the kudos was awarded.

● To: First Name: The first name of the recipient of the kudos.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 105

Page 106: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 106/228

● To: Last Name: The last name of the recipient of the kudos.

● To: User ID: The SAP Jam user ID of the recipient of the kudos.

● Comment: The comment, if any sent with the kudos.

● Status: Whether or not the kudos was Hidden or Shown.

● From: Email Address: The email address of the user who awarded the kudos.

● From: First Name: The last name of the user who awarded the kudos.

● From: Last Name: The last name of the user who awarded the kudos.

● From: User ID: The SAP Jam user ID of the user who awarded the kudos.

3.10.13 Mobile Activation Report details

This report shows information on each user listed, which are the users who have installed the SAP Jam Mobile app

and activated it in response to the invitations sent from the  Admin SAP Jam Mobile app  page.

Report options

The options that are available when this report type is selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Company-wide totals are shown for:

● Number of Users with Activated Devices: The number of unique users who have activated devices.

● Activated iOS Devices: The number of iOS devices in your company.

● Activated Android Devices: The number of Android devices in your company.

● Total Number of Activated Devices: The total number of mobile devices in your company.

Also, rows are shown for each user with the following columns of information:

● User ID: The SAP Jam ID of the user who activated their SAP Jam Mobile app on their device.

● First Name: The first name of the user who activated their SAP Jam Mobile app on their device.

● Last Name: The last name of the user who activated their SAP Jam Mobile app on their device.

● Email Address: The email address of the user who activated their SAP Jam Mobile app on their device.

● Activated iOS Devices: The number of iOS devices on which the user has activated the SAP Jam Mobile app.

● Activated Android Devices: The number of Android devices on which the user has activated the SAP Jam

Mobile app.

● Total Number of Activated Devices: The total number of mobile devices on which the user has activated

their SAP Jam Mobile app.

106 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 107: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 107/228

3.10.14 Terms of Service Compliance Report details

This report shows information on each user listed, which are the users who have accepted the Terms of Serviceset in the  Admin Custom Terms of Service  page.

Report options

The options that are available when this report type is selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Shows a row for each user with the following columns of information:

● User ID: The SAP Jam user ID of the user who has accepted their Terms of Service.

● First Name: The first name of the user who has accepted their Terms of Service.

● Last Name: The last name of the user who has accepted their Terms of Service.

● Email Address: The email address of the user who has accepted their Terms of Service.● Status: The status of the user who has accepted their Terms of Service (Active or Alumni).

● Accepted Version: The version number of the Terms of Service that the user has accepted. Terms of Service

as numbered incrementally as they are added (1, 2, 3, etc.).

● Accepted Time: The time at which the user has accepted their Terms of Service.

● Link: The URL to the Terms of Service that the user has accepted.

3.10.15 Top Disk Usage per Group or per User report details

These reports show information on each user or group listed, depending on which report you selected, which

allows you to view how much disk storage is being consumed by by each user or by each group.

Note

In addition to these reports, notifications are sent to company administrators when they are at 80% and 100%

of their storage allocation. If you receive an "80% usage" notification, you should either free up storage by

deleting old content or contact your SAP Jam Support representative to purchase more storage space. If you

receive a "100% usage" notification, your users will no longer be able to upload content, so acting to resolve the

problem becomes vital. These notifications occur daily, are not configurable, and cannot be turned off. The

configuration required to ensure that you (administrators) receive these notifications is described in About

notification emails [page 67].

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 107

Page 108: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 108/228

Report options

The options that are available when these report types are selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Shows a row for each user or group (depending on the report requested) with the following columns of

information:

● User ID (User report only): The SAP Jam user ID of the user that is being reported on.

● First Name (User report only): The first name of the user that is being reported on.

● Last Name (User report only): The last name of the user that is being reported on.

● Email (User report only): The email address of the user being reported on.

● (Group) Name (Group report only): The name of the group that is being reported on.

● Last Updated (Group report only): The date and time that the group's content was last updated.

● Storage Usage (MB): The amount of stored data in megabytes.

● Storage Usage in Trash (MB): The amount of data stored in the trash bin of the user or group.

3.10.16 User Contribution Activity Report details

This report shows information on each user listed, with aggregate counts of the content that they have

contributed per type of content in the specified time range, as well as a total count of all content types.

Report options

The options that are available when this report type is selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Time Frame (Start Date and End Date): The calendar-selected start and end points for the reporting period.

Note

For this report, the start date and end dates that are selected must be in the same month.

● Group: Whether to report on all groups, or the selected specific group.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

108 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 109: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 109/228

Report details

Shows a row for each user with the following columns of information:

● User ID: The user's SAP Jam user ID.

● Email Address: The user's email address.

● First Name: The user's first name.

● Last Name: The user's last name.

● User Status: Whether the user is Active or an Alumni.

● Groups Created: A count of the groups created in the specified period.

● Blogs: A count of the blogs posted in the specified period.

● Chats: A count of the chats participated that the user in during the specified period.

● Comments: A count of the comments made in the specified period.

●Discussions: A count of the discussions created in the specified period.

● Documents: A count of the documents uploaded in the specified period.

● Expertise Added: A count of the areas of expertise added in the specified period.

● Expertise Endorsed: A count of the endorsements of other users' areas of expertise in the specified period.

● Ideas: A count of the ideas proposed in the specified period.

● Questions: A count of the questions asked in the specified period.

● Kudos Sent: A count of the kudos awarded in the specified period.

● Links: A count of the links added in the specified period.

● Photos: A count of the photos uploaded in the specified period.

● Polls: A count of the polls created in the specified period.

● Poll Votes: A count of the poll votes cast in the specified period.

● Status Updates: A count of the status updates made in the specified period.

● Tasks: A count of the tasks assigned in the specified period.

● Tags: A count of the tags created in the specified period.

● Videos: A count of the videos created in the specified period.

● Wikis: A count of the wiki pages created in the specified period.

● Overview Pages: A count of the overview pages created in the specified period.

● Total Contribution: A total count of all content created in the specified period.

3.10.17 User Contribution by Week or Month report details

These reports show information on each user listed, with counts of total number of content items contributed

shown for each week/month in the time period, as well as a total count for the entire time period. Only users who

have contributed at least one item within the requested time frame are listed.

Report options

The options that are available when these report types are selected are:

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 109

Page 110: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 110/228

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Time Frame (Start Date and End Date): The calendar-selected start and end points for the reporting period.

● Group: Whether to report on all groups, or the selected specific group.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Shows a row for each user with the following columns of information:

● User ID: The user's SAP Jam user ID.

● Email Address: The user's email address.

● First Name: The user's first name.

● Last Name: The user's last name.

● User Status: Whether the user is Active or an Alumni.

● (time period): The total number of content items added by the user in each week/month in the specified

period.

● Total Contribution: The total number of content items added by the user in the entire specified period.

3.10.18 User Page Views Report by Week or Month details

These reports show information on each user listed, the count of content pages that they have viewed for each

time period, week or month, and the total views in the full reporting period. Only users who have viewed at least

one item within the requested time frame are listed.

Report options

The options that are available when these report types are selected are:

● Users: Whether to report on company users or guest users.

● Time Frame (Start Date and End Date): The calendar-selected start and end points for the reporting period.

● Group: Whether to report on all groups, or the selected specific group.

● Show metadata: Whether to include report headings that show the report name and the selected report

options.

Report details

Shows a row for each user with the following columns of information:

● User ID: The user's SAP Jam user ID.

110 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration

Page 111: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 111/228

● Email Address: The user's email address.

● First Name: The user's first name.

● Last Name: The user's last name.

● (time period): The total number of content views by the user in each week/month in the specified period.

● Total: The total number of content views by the user in the entire specified period.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Administration © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 111

Page 112: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 112/228

4 Integrations

4.1 Integrations overview

This section describes how to integrate various applications with SAP Jam. There are three general types of

integrations available:

● Business records integrations: You can integrate data from business-critical applications, which SAP Jam

refers to as "business records".

● Document repositories integrations: You can integrate repositories or libraries of documents.

● Other SAP Jam integrations: There are also other types of integrations, including OpenSocial gadgets,

gamification, web widgets, or integrating SAP Jam features into other applications using the SAP Jam API.

Note

The SAP Jam Administration Guide section numbers referred to in the following diagrams and listed section

refer to the section numbers that appear in the PDF version of the guide.

112 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 113: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 113/228

SAP Jam business records integrations

Figure 85: SAP Jam business records integrations

● New or custom integrations: SAP Jam allows you to develop new or custom integrations by leveraging the

external application's OData API and OData Annotations. This approach requires some programming work.

The mechanisms through which you can develop new or custom integrations are:

○ Through the SAP NetWeaver Gateway (which can supply OData and user identity services for on-

premises applications).

○ Through the SAP HANA Cloud Platform (which can supply OData and user identity services for cloud-

hosted applications [SaaS]).

○ By directly accessing the external application's existing OData API and annotations.

For these new or custom integrations, some development work is required. The procedures for developing

these integrations are discussed in the External Applications section of the SAP Jam Developer Guide.

● Pre-configured integrations: The most common business record integrations are available as "ready-made"

configurations for which the OData Annotations file has already been developed. These integrations are

documented in the Integrate business records [page 116] section, which includes instructions on how to:

○ Integrate SAP CRM [page 122]

○ Integrate SAP ECC (SD) [page 132]

○ Integrate SAP Cloud for Customer [page 145]

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 113

Page 114: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 114/228

○ Integrate SuccessFactors Learning [page 146]

● Configure access and authorization for integrated applications: To enable access between SAP Jam and

these various external applications, one or more of the following access and authorization mechanisms must

be configured:○ Add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156] for external applications (business records and document

repositories) if your organization's network uses unrecognized, self-signed SSL certificates.

○ Add an OAuth Client [page 158] to configure an entry point which is used by external applications to

request authorizations from SAP Jam, which is required for the external application to initiate requests to

the SAP Jam API.

○ Add SAML Trusted IDPs [page 161] to setup a relationship that SAP Jam trusts to make authenticated

per-user requests from SAP Jam, for example, to display data from SAP Jam by using the SAP Jam API.

○ Configure SAP Jam as a SAML Local Identity Provider [page 163] to have SAP Jam act as the trusted

SAML identity provider for external applications seeking single sign-on (SSO) user identity confirmation,

which allows SAP Jam to make per-user requests of external applications' APIs.

SAP Jam document repository integrations

Figure 86: SAP Jam document repository integrations

114 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 115: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 115/228

Integrate document repositories [page 165] from external applications to display the structured containers of

those documents, and the documents that are contained in those structures, in SAP Jam. You can:

● Integrate SharePoint 2010 or 2013 [page 171]

○ Note that for SharePoint 2013 & 2010 integrations, you can include SAP Jam documents in the searches

on SharePoint, as described in Federate SAP Jam search results into SharePoint searches [page 174].

This option uses SharePoint's OpenSearch conformance, as shown in the above diagram.

● Integrate Alfresco One 4.2 [page 179]

● Integrate SAP Extended ECM by OpenText [page 182]

● Integrate SAP Mobile Documents [page 190]

● Integrate Box [page 195]

● Integrate Office 365 SharePoint Sites [page 186]

● Integrate Google Drive [page 201]

Other SAP Jam integrations

Figure 87: Other SAP Jam integrations

Other SAP Jam integrations that are available include:

● Add OpenSocial gadgets [page 205] to extend SAP Jam's abilities to interact with any software or service.

Also see the OpenSocial gadgets section in the SAP Jam Developer Guide for information on how to develop

an OpenSocial gadget.

● Integrate SAP Jam with gamification vendors [page 210] to help guide and reward new hires and existing

employees to rapidly integrate SAP Jam into their work processes.

● Use the SAP Jam Widget Builders [page 215] to integrate several SAP Jam features into web pages. Also see

the Embeddable widgets section in the SAP Jam Developer Guide.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 115

Page 116: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 116/228

● Use the SAP Jam API to integrate SAP Jam features into external applications. This documentation is in the

SAP Jam Developer Guide.

● You can also integrate the SuccessFactors Human Capital Management (HCM) Suite's Time Off and

Employee Central Payroll data, although this integration is actually done in SuccessFactors Foundation. Theintegration procedures are documented in the following documents, which are located in the SuccessFactors

HCM Suite Integration section of the SAP Help Portal:

○ Time Off and Employee Central Payroll Integration Guide

○ Metadata Framework (MDF) Implementation Guide , Chapter 10 MDF Security Using Role-Based

Permissions, sections 10.1 and 10.2. Note that you may need to modify rules for the EmployeeTime object

(see "Adding Rules", section 3.3.4).

4.2 Integrate business records

Content from business-critical applications can be integrated into SAP Jam for viewing and interactive use. There

are two main types of content that can be integrated into SAP Jam: Business Records and Document

Repositories. Each type of content can be integrated using the particular technologies that are appropriate for

the specific selected application.

● Business Records: Data from a variety of business applications can be displayed in SAP Jam by getting the

data from that application's OData API, or from an intermediary platform that supplies an OData API for that

application, and using an OData annotations file to specify how each type of data is displayed in a specified UI

element. This type of content is referred to as Business Records.

●Document Repositories: For more information on integrating documents from an external documentrepository or library, please see the Integrate document repositories [page 165] section, later in this chapter.

Procedures required to integrate business records into SAP Jam

The procedures for integrating business records are listed below, and are illustrated in the diagram that follows:

1. Perform any required preparations on the external application or the intermediary platform. This mostly

involves establishing trusted data communications with SAP Jam.

2. Add a Trusted Certificate Authority if your organization requires the use of unrecognized or self-signed

certificates. This allows your browser to use the HTTPS/TLS connection to access the external application's

data without obstruction.

3. Optionally, you can also allow the external application to open a connection to SAP Jam, which allows updates

and feed events to be forwarded to SAP Jam. There are two ways to configure this, depending on the

requirements of your external application:

1. Add an OAuth Client

2. Add a SAML Trusted IDP

3. Configure SAP Jam as a SAML Local Identity Provider

4. Register the external business application in SAP Jam. This mostly involves establishing trusted data

communications with the external application.

5. Develop an OData Annotations file to display the business records if you are integrating business records

via the SAP HANA Cloud Platform, or you are doing a new or custom integration via SAP NetWeaver Gateway,

116 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 117: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 117/228

or integrating a business application directly from a Third Party OData Source. Note that this is a developer

task, and you should be following the procedures described in the External Applications section of the SAP

Jam Developer Guide.

6. Register the business records that you want to expose for viewing in SAP Jam.7. You can modify the data exposed in business records in two ways:

1. Add a filter to any business record to narrow the range of results displayed in a particular business

record, allowing finer-grained usage of the data across multiple business records that can be displayed in

different SAP Jam groups.

2. Set a sort order for any business record, which determines the order in which the rows of information will

be displayed in the business record.

Note that for SuccessFactors Learning, filters are pre-configured and cannot be modified, and a sort order is

not relevant.

8. Add the business records to a SAP Jam group and your group members will be able to view and discuss the

external data in SAP Jam.

Figure 88: Work required to integrate business records

Organization and coverage of these procedures in the SAP Jam Administrator

Guide

Procedure 1 (Perform any required preparations), procedure 4 (Register the external business application in SAP

Jam), and procedure 6 (Register the business records) in the above diagram are documented together in per-

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 117

Page 118: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 118/228

application integration pages, as these sections require considerable application-specific information, and they

are most clearly dealt with by combining these instructions in the following sections:

● Integrate SAP CRM [page 122]

● Integrate SAP ECC (SD) [page 132]

● Integrate SAP Cloud for Customer [page 145]

● Integrate SuccessFactors Learning [page 146]

The procedures for configuring access and authorization, which are procedure 2 (Add a Trusted Certificate

Authority), procedure 3a (Add an OAuth Client), procedure 3b (Add a SAML Trusted IDP), and procedure 3c

(Configure SAP Jam as a SAML Local Identity Provider) in the above diagram, are documented in separate

sections as these steps are generally the same for all business records and document repositories integrations

(although application-specific information is required in some fields). These procedures are documented in the

following pages:

● Add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156] to configure access to web-based applications and services

within your organization if unrecognized or self-signed certificates are used.

● Add an OAuth Client [page 158] to allow an external application to access the SAP Jam API.

● Add SAML Trusted IDPs [page 161] to allow an external application to access SAP Jam user ID and

authorization information so that it will display only the material that a user is authorized to view when SAP

Jam features are integrated into the external application.

● Configure SAP Jam as a SAML Local Identity Provider [page 163] to allow SAP Jam to access an external

application's user ID and authorization information so that it will display only the material that a user is

authorized to view when they view pages where integrated external application business records are

displayed in SAP Jam.

Procedure 5 (Develop the business record's annotations file) is a development step that is only required if you are

developing a new or custom integration, in which case you should be following the procedures described in the

External Applications section of the SAP Jam Developer Guide.

With the specific business records added, you can also modify the data displayed in the business records for SAP

CRM, SAP ECC (SD), and SAP Cloud for Customer, (in other words, these configurations are not available for a

SuccessFactors Learning integration) in the following ways:

● procedure 7a Add a business record filter [page 153] This configuration allow you to narrow the range of

results displayed in a particular business record, which permits finer-grained usage of the data across

multiple business records that can be displayed in different SAP Jam groups.

● procedure 7b Add a business record sort order [page 154] This configuration determines the order in which

the rows of information will be displayed in the business record.

Now that all of the configuration steps are done, users can add business records to their groups, procedure 8(Add the business records to a SAP Jam group), which is described in the section:

● Configure access to business records in SAP Jam [page 155]

A preview of the Admin UI screens and the information required to integrate

External Applications

This section provides a quick preview of the SAP Jam Admin console pages in which the configuration procedures

are performed, and the information that is required in those pages, for the integration steps described in the per-

application integration pages listed above (procedures 4 and 6).

118 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 119: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 119/228

These SAP Jam Admin console pages and the required information to fill these forms are as follows:

● After the required configuration is done on the external application or intermediary platform, the external

business application must be registered in SAP Jam by accessing the Admin console [page 11] and selecting

External Applications from the left navigation sidebar, clicking Add Application, and then selecting the type of

application that you want to integrate from the drop-down menu.

Figure 89: Register the external business application in SAP Jam

The available options for adding a business records application are:

○ SAP NetWeaver Gateway: This platform is used to provide OData APIs and related services for on-

premises applications. Use this option to integrate the preconfigured applications:

○ SAP CRM

○ SAP ECC (SD)

○ SAP Cloud for Customer: Use this option for the preconfigured integration of SAP Cloud for Customer

only.

○ SuccessFactors Learning: Use this option for the preconfigured integration of SuccessFactors Learning

only.

○ SAP HANA Cloud Platform and Third Party OData Source: Use these option to develop a new

integration of an application accessed by the HANA Cloud Platform or one that already has its own OData

API. Again, please note that if you are developing a new or custom integration with a business records

application, you should be following the procedures in the External Applications section of the SAP Jam

Developer Guide.

When you select one of the above-listed business record integration options, a page is displayed showing a

form for the fields and options required to establish a trusted data exchange between SAP Jam and either the

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 119

Page 120: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 120/228

business application being integrated or the intermediary platform that is hosting the business application.

There is some variation in the fields of information that are required for these different options, which are

shown in the following diagram.

Figure 90: Fields available in the business record Add Application forms

● You must also Register each of the business records that you want to expose for use in SAP Jam. This page is

accessed by clicking on the Action menu in the row for the application in the External Applications main page

that you are integrating, and selecting Manage Record Types from the drop-down menu, and then clicking Add

Record Type.

120 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 121: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 121/228

Figure 91: The Add Record Type page

The options in this page are the same for all business records integrations.

Note

Next: If you are ready to begin to integrate an external application's business records into SAP Jam, proceed to

the appropriate instructions:

● Integrate SAP CRM [page 122]

● Integrate SAP ECC (SD) [page 132]

● Integrate SAP Cloud for Customer [page 145]

● Integrate SuccessFactors Learning [page 146]

If you intend to perform a new or custom integration, not one of the above-listed "pre-configured" integrations,

see:

● Develop a new or custom business records integration [page 122]

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 121

Page 122: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 122/228

4.2.1 Develop a new or custom business records integration

SAP Jam offers the capability to develop new or custom business records integrations. The approaches to doing

so are:

● You can develop a new or custom integration with an on-premises application that lacks an OData API by

using the SAP NetWeaver Gateway.

● You can develop a new integration with a cloud-hosted application (SaaS) that lacks an OData API by using

the SAP HANA Cloud Platform.

● You can develop a new integration with an application that does have an OData API by using the SAP Jam

"Third Party OData Source" option.

If you are planning on developing any of these options, you should follow the instructions in the External

Applications section of the SAP Jam Developer Guide.

Note that the SAP HANA Cloud Platform offers a wide array of options for accessing an application's data via an

OData API. To select and configure the option that works best for you and your organization, please see the SAP

HANA Cloud Platform documentation Help Portal at https://help.hana.ondemand.com/.

4.2.2 Integrate SAP CRM

Overview

Configuring a SAP Jam integration with SAP CRM and SAP NetWeaver Gateway involves three main steps:

1. Configure SAP CRM to call SAP Jam.

Use the guide Connecting SAP Jam with SAP ABAP Systems  to set up SAP Jam to trust SAP CRM as a

SAML Identity Provider, and set up the OAuth client in SAP Jam so that CRM users can make status posts to

Jam from within SAP CRM.

2. Configure SAP NetWeaver Gateway to send SAP CRM business record change notifications to Jam.

Use the guide Distributing SAP Gateway Notifications to SAP Jam  to set up Jam to trust the SAP

NetWeaver Gateway as a SAML Identity Provider and set up the OAuth client in SAP Jam so that the SAP

NetWeaver Gateway can post business record change notification events to SAP Jam.

3. Configure SAP Jam to call SAP NetWeaver Gateway OData APIs.

Use either the Common User Authentication or Per-User Authentication configurations in SAP Jam

 Admin console External Applications Add/Edit External Application  to enable SAP Jam to display SAP 

CRM data using the SAP NetWeaver Gateway OData APIs.

Note

You will need to open a port in your company’s firewall to allow SAP Jam to call into your SAP NetWeaver

Gateway system.

122 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 123: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 123/228

Using Common-User authentication in a CRM integration

Note

This configuration uses a common user for Jam-to-Gateway OData calls, which is suitable for testing and

prototyping development or test environments only.

Figure 92: Common-User authentication in a CRM integration

Using Per-User Authentication in a CRM integration

In this configuration, SAP Jam makes OData calls to the SAP NetWeaver Gateway using SuccessFactors BizX user

accounts that are mapped to SAP NetWeaver Gateway and SAP CRM accounts. In this way, each user can have

different permissions set for different SAP CRM business records. SAP strongly recommends that you configure

Per-User Authentication for production systems.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 123

Page 124: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 124/228

Figure 93: Per-User authentication in a CRM integration

SAP NetWeaver Gateway Configuration Steps

Before configuring the SAP NetWeaver Gateway, ensure that you have applied note (patch) 2083419. Once this is

done, perform the following procedures.On the Gateway hub server:

1. Call the transaction/n/IWFND/MAINT_SERVICE and register the new service /CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV

(version = 0001).

2. Specify the system alias of the back-end system that will be connected.

If necessary, a new system alias can be created from the given transaction by pressing the Customizing

button in the System Aliases section.

3. Check whether the OData ICF node is activated by doing the following:

1. Select the registered OData Service in the service catalog.

2. Click the ICF Node button on the OData ICF node entry.

3. In the button menu select Activate.

Activate the OData Service for Business Record Change Notification:

1. Choose the Customizing activity SAP NetWeaver Application Server Basis Services Collaboration

Gateway Notifications Activate OData Service for Notification .

2. Register the following OData Services:

Table 21:

Service Provider External Service Name Send

Jam CRMSWI01 CRMSMI_SRV All notifications

124 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 125: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 125/228

Service Provider External Service Name Send

StreamWork CRMSWI01 CRMSMI_SRV All notifications

3. Establish a secure connection between your SAP Jam instance and your Gateway hub server (or proxy), using

the OAuth 2.0 SAML bearer assertion flow.

Follow the instructions at Using OAuth 2.0 from a Web Application with SAML Bearer Assertion Flow .

4. On the CRM system:

1. Start transactionSM31

2. At view CLBV_APPLI_CONT, be sure that the following application contexts exist:

○ CRM - SAP Jam Integration with SAP CRM

○ SAIL - Social Media ABAP Integration Library (Default)

5. Choose the Customizing activity SAP NetWeaver Application Server Basis Services Collaboration

Gateway Notifications Define OData Service Registry .

6. Add the following entries:

BUS1006 CRM ==> New external service name /CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV, 

new OData request URL /sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/BUS2000111 CRM==> New external service name /CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV, 

new OData request URL /sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/

7. Add the following new entries for the corresponding annotation files:

BUS1006/ANNO_P CRM /CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV 

/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/AnnotationCollection('x')/Content/$valueBUS2000111/ANNO_P CRM /CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV 

/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/AnnotationCollection('x')/Content/$value

For all these services, Service Provider = StreamWork will be registered in the view cluster. This meansthat SAP Jam is in compatibility mode with SAP StreamWork.

Connecting Gateway to Multiple CRM Systems

If your Gateway system is connected to multiple CRM systems, you can either:

● Configure aliases in the Gateway

● Set the NetWeaver Client ID in Jam

Setting the NetWeaver Client ID in Jam has the advantage of allowing you to keep Development, Test, andProduction systems separate. The user authentication between the different clients and CRM systems are

completely separate in this approach. For example:

Gateway System GW2, Client 001, User JOHNSMITH may be able to access

CRM System CR1, Client 002, User JOHNSMITH, but not

CRM System CR2, Client 002, User JOHNSMITH.

It is also simpler to configure.

● To configure aliases in the Gateway:

1. Specify multiple system aliases in the Gateway hub system.

2. Register all these systems aliases at transaction /n/IWFND/MAINT_SERVICE of the Gateway hub for

service /CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV;.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 125

Page 126: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 126/228

3. Change the object registration at SAP Jam accordingly: for all objects mentioned before, the URL will

contain /CRMSMI_SRV;o=<system alias>/ instead of /CRMSMI_SRV/. Duplicate the objects (per

system alias) that you would like to address. For example, an Account URL for CRM System CR2, Client

003 would become:

https://gw.mycompany.com/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV;o=CR2CLNT003/$metadata#PartnerCollection

● To set the NetWeaver Client ID in Jam:

○ Follow the instructions in "Register SAP CRM business records in SAP Jam" below.

Set up required access and authorization

These procedures establish the access and authorization configurations in SAP Jam that are required for theintegration of SAP CRM:

● Add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156] if your network uses unrecognized or self-signed HTTP with

TLS or SSL certificates.

● Add an OAuth Client [page 158] to configure an authorized entry point, for SAP CRM to initiate requests to

the SAP Jam API in order to display SAP Jam content in SAP CRM.

● Add SAML Trusted IDPs [page 161] to establish a trust relationship between SAP CRM and SAP Jam that

allows SAP CRM to use SAP Jam identity and authorization information, which ensures that SAP CRM users

can only view the SAP Jam content that they are allowed to view when SAP Jam content is displayed in SAP

CRM.

● Configure SAP Jam as a SAML Local Identity Provider [page 163] to establish a trust relationship between

SAP Jam and SAP CRM that allows SAP Jam to use SAP CRM identity and authorization information, which

ensures that SAP Jam users can only view the SAP CRM content that they are allowed to view when SAP CRM

content is displayed in SAP Jam.

Register SAP CRM as an External Application in SAP Jam

Create an External Application entry to register your SAP CRM application with SAP Jam. This procedure is the

required step in SAP Jam for setting up a secure data connection with your external business application via SAP

NetWeaver Gateway.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External A pplications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  page is displayed. This initial page is a catalog of the external

applications that have been configured for your organization's SAP Jam instance.

2. Click Add Application.

A drop-down menu listing the available external application types is displayed.

126 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 127: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 127/228

Figure 94: Register SAP CRM in SAP Jam

3. Select SAP NetWeaver Gateway as the external application type that you want to add from the drop-down

menu.

4. Type in a meaningful name in the Name text box, such as one that names the external application and/or its

dedicated use.

Note

This name will appear in the SAP Jam navigation sidebar and in other locations in SAP Jam, so it is

important to make it something recognizable.

5. Select the Authentication Type.○ Use the Common user option for testing and development purposes only.

Figure 95: Common user options

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 127

Page 128: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 128/228

For the Common user option, set the following:

1. User name: This is the user name of the generic user account that will be used to access the service

on behalf of all of the SAP Jam users.

2. Password: This is the password of the generic user account that will be used to access the service onbehalf of all of the SAP Jam users.

In the Common User authentication mode, all access from SAP Jam to the external data source will be

made through an HTTP Basic authentication call using the provided user credentials. This is

recommended only if you wish to expose all of the data in the data source to all SAP Jam users in your

company. In other words, ensure that all the data exposed through the application can be considered

"public" within your company.

○ Use the Per user option for production systems.

Figure 96: Per-user options

For the Per user option, set the following:

1. OAuth 2.0 Client Id: Your organization's client ID with your OAuth 2.0 SSO provider.

2. Secret: Your organization's OAuth 2.0 SSO secret.

3. Service Provider: The URL of your organization's OAuth 2.0 SSO provider, set in three parts: protocol,

host, and port number.

4. Service Provider Name: The name of your organization's OAuth 2.0 SSO provider.

5. Scope: Your organization's company name as set in SAP Jam. This can be found in the  Jam Admin

General  page.

In the Per-User authentication mode, SAP Jam authenticates the current user against the externalapplication through the OAuth 2.0 SAML bearer assertion work flow. Since SAP Jam delegates its user

authentication to SuccessFactors Platform, a trust relationship must first be established between the

external application and the SuccessFactors Platform. Once this relationship is established, an OAuth

client for SAP Jam is configured in the external application, using the SuccessFactors Platform IDP as the

issuer of identity assertions for the client.

When an SAP Jam user attempts to access the external data source, Jam will first post a SAML assertion

on the user's identity to the external object in exchange for an OAuth token for that user. If successful,

SAP Jam will use this OAuth token for all subsequent data access on behalf of that user.

More detail can be found at: http://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-oauth-saml2-bearer-20 .

6. Set the NetWeaver Client Id.

This is the three-digit login parameter for your NetWeaver client.

128 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 129: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 129/228

Figure 97: The Add External Application dialog box, latter options

7. Optionally, Select Trusted OAuth Client from the drop-down menu.This is required if you want the external application, which supplies the business records, to be able to post

feed updates in SAP Jam.

8. Select the source of the SAML assertion provided by SAP Jam from the drop-down menu.

The default for this option is SAP Jam, but you can select SuccessFactors Foundation. This should be set to

match the source that you use to supply your user identity information.

9. Click Save.

You are returned to the  Jam Admin External Applications  page, where the list of external applications

that have been added is displayed, now including the external application that you have just registered.

Troubleshooting

If you only see the notification in SAP Jam, but no back-end data is rendered in the Quick View on mouse-over, you

should check the error log (transaction /IWFND/ERROR_LOG) and the application log (transaction SLG1,

application /IWFND/) of the connected Gateway hub system.

Register SAP CRM business records in SAP Jam

Once you have completed the required configuration to access your external SAP CRM application from SAP Jam,

you need to further configure it by adding the particular business records that you want to access.

To register business records:

1. In the  Admin console External Applications  section, click on Action beside the OData application for

which you want to add objects and select Manage Record Types from the context menu.

The Manage Record Types screen is displayed for that application.

2. Click Add Record.

The Manage Record Types screen is displayed for that application.

3. Click Add Record.

The Add Record Type dialog box is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 129

Page 130: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 130/228

Figure 98: The Add Record Type dialog box

4. In the Name field, enter a meaningful name for the object that you want to add.

5. Enter the External Type and Annotation for the type of object that you want to add.

The External Type must be the URL to OData metadata EntityType of the record that you are adding; the

 Annotation must be the URL to the OData annotations file, which describes how the incoming data will be laid

out in a graphical element of the UI. These entries differ for each Application Type and record type that you

want to display:

○ For a Corporate Account business record, enter:

External Type:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/$metadata#CorporateAccountCollection

 Annotation:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/AnnotationCollection(Content='x')/ 

Content/$value

130 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 131: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 131/228

○ For an Individual Account business record, enter:

External Type:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/$metadata#IndividualAccountCollection

 Annotation:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/AnnotationCollection(Content='x')/ 

Content/$value

○ For an Opportunity business record, enter:

External Type:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/$metadata#OpportunityCollection

 Annotation:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/AnnotationCollection(Content='x')/ 

Content/$value

○ For an Service Request business record, enter:

External Type:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/$metadata#ServiceRequestCollection

 Annotation:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/AnnotationCollection(Content='x')/ 

Content/$value

In the above examples, the External Type URLs are fixed except for the host domain. For the Annotation URLs,

however, the actual URL will depend on where you have placed your annotation XML file; whatever the URL is,

it must return the appropriate annotation file.

6. Select the language or languages that the imported record will be displayed in by clicking Add Language and

checking the check box in front of each language that you want the data displayed in.

The selected language or languages will appear above the  Add Language button. Click the "X" on the right side

of any language button to remove it. Note that the first language listed will always be the "Primary" language.

7. Select Import External Resources to import the data using the URLs listed above.SAP Jam will attempt to import the indicated resources, and it will display a message indicating the success

or failure of the import, and information on the cause of a failure if one occurs and the cause can be

determined.

8. Select Can be featured or unfeatured in groups to enable this option.

9. Select Can be primary object in top-level group to enable this option.

10. Select Can be primary object in subgroup to enable this option.

11. Select Filter Feed to enable users to add or remove feed entries of this object type.

12. Select Feed History to see the feed history independently of follows, which means:

○ If disabled, the user will only see the subset of feed items that were routed to their home feed; that is, they

will only see items which had a distribution list that included them, or items in which the user was at-

mentioned.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 131

Page 132: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 132/228

○ If enabled, and if authorization is successful, the user will see the full feed for the object, including items

that would otherwise not be visible to them.

13. Select Show Search to enable keyword searching in the business data browser.

When rendering a list of External Objects, SAP Jam may also show a "search" box. If this option is selected,you can also set:

○ In the Hint field, you can enter a display string that tells the user what field the search is performed on.

○ In the Property field, you can enter the actual OData property name that the search is performed on.

Internally, Jam will make a [GET] request to the OData collection for the given object type, using an OData

$filter expression on the Property specified in the configuration screen. For example:

[GET] <OData Service Root>/ObjectCollection?$filter=startswith('text',Property)

14. Select Can be mentioned in feed posts to enable this option. If this option is selected, you can also set:

○ Primary (Search) Property: enter the OData property name that an at-mention look-up will search for.

○ Secondary (Display) Property: enter the OData property name that an at-mention look-up will display.15. Once you have configured the record to your satisfaction, click Save.

You are returned to the <External_App_Name> Record Types catalog, and the record type that you just added

will be listed in the table.

Note

Next:

You can now, optionally, add an External Application Object Filter [page 153] to narrow the range of data

shown in a particular external application data object.

Additionally, you can now, optionally, add an External Application Object Sort Order [page 154]  to set the

order in which the external data is arranged in a particular external application data object.

If you do not want or need to add Filters or Sort Fields to your External Application Objects, you can proceed to

Configure access to business records in SAP Jam [page 155].

4.2.3 Integrate SAP ECC (SD)

A SAP Jam integration with SAP Sales and Distribution (SD) allows you to integrate SD processes with SAP Jam,

such as creating a SAP Jam group from a business record overview page, or following updates to a SAP Jamgroup from within the SD GUI. Also, SAP NetWeaver Gateway services are used to send notifications about

changes to SD business records to SAP Jam subscribers. SAP Jam subscribers receive these updates in SAP Jam

as feed entries.

This integration can, optionally, include an integration with SAP CRM. If you choose this option, you must perform

both the NetWeaver preparation procedures in Integrate SAP CRM [page 122] and the procedures in this page.

This page covers the following configuration tasks:

● Enabling subscriptions to the following SD-specific business records:

○ Sales Orders

○ Invoices

○ Quotations

132 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 133: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 133/228

○ Customers

○ Outbound Deliveries

● Configuring the SD-specific ESJI_SD_SRV OData service to distribute SAP Gateway notifications for the

supported business records.The SAIL configuration guide Distributing SAP Gateway Notifications to SAP Jam  provides generic

descriptions of the required tasks for configuring the Send Notifications scenario. You have to complete these

tasks to distribute SAP Gateway notifications.

Use the SD-specific information for the Send Notification scenario in SAP ECC SD, as described in this page,

when you complete the respective sections in the generic SAIL guide.

Note

You must complete the configuration steps as described in the SAIL configuration guide Connecting SAP Jam

with SAP ABAP Systems  before continuing with the rest of the procedures in this page.

Figure 99: SAP ECC ERP with SAP CRM network overview

Required SAP Versions

● SAP ECC:

○ EhP7 SP04 with Note 2009570

○ EhP7 SP05 (RTC in July, 2014)

○ EhP7 SP06 (RTC EO November, 2014)

● SAP Netweaver Gateway: The SAP ECC scenario has the same requirements as the SAP CRM scenario.

● SAP CRM:

○ Software Component: CRMSWI01 CRM-BF-SW

○ 2003000: Allows you to view Quotations in a CRM Corporate Account group; adds a link to ECC

Quotations from the CRM annotation

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 133

Page 134: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 134/228

○ SAP CRM Add-On:

1797033 Customizing Guide: Business Object Change Notification

1835654 No notifications for address fields of corporate account

1837380 Block BO Notifications on BO Org. Data Change

○ SAP CRM Add-On: Thing Inspector

1891369 Opportunity and Account OData Services for SAP Jam

1928182 Service Request: OData Service for SAP Jam

1941833 OData Service for SAP Jam integration: Corrections

1988318 Exception occurred with request for individual and corporate account

1938485 Globalization: Multiple Language Support for OData Service /CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/

1989573 Missing properties at account entity types

1972217 OData service /CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/ shall support the combination of OrderBy and

Top

1896961 HTTP/HTTPS Configuration for SAP NetWeaver Gateway (GW)

1797103 OAuth Implementation for NW Releases < 7.40 (GW)

Subscriptions in SAP SD

To enable users to follow or unfollow particular business records, the Generic Object Services (GOS) drop-down

menu has to be available in the user interface of SAP Sales and Distribution (SD).

GOS provides different functions such as adding an attachment, creating a document link, or displaying all

attachments. Attachments are specific to a particular SAP object.

Prerequisites

You have activated the following business functions:

● BC_SRV_STW_03

● LOG_SD_JAM_INTEG

To activate the GOS drop-down menu in the SD SAP GUI:

134 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 135: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 135/228

Figure 100: The Follow button in ECC

1. Run transaction SU3.

2. On the Parameters tab, in the SET/GET Parameter ID field, enter SD_SWU_ACTIVE.

3. In the Parameter Value field, enter X or *.

This activates the GOS button in the following SD transactions:

○ Update Sales Order (VA02)/Display Sales Order (VA03)

○ Update Invoice (vf02)/Display Invoice (vf03)

○ Update Quotation (VA22)/Display Quotation (VA23)

○ Update Customer (XD02)/Display Customer (XD03)

○ Update Delivery (VL02n)/Display Delivery (VL03n)

Configuring the ESJI_SD_SRV OData Service on the SAP Gateway server

The configuration tasks on the SAP Gateway server for the Send Notifications scenario are described in chapter 3,

Configuration of the SAP Gateway Server, of the SAIL configuration guide Distributing SAP Gateway Notifications

to SAP Jam .

In this procedure, you register the ESJI_SD_SRV OData service in the Gateway system. This service is defined in,

and delivered with, the back-end system add-on.

Use the values in the following procedure when completing section 3.7 Configuring OData Services of the SAIL

guide.

To configure the ESJI_SD_SRV OData service

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 135

Page 136: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 136/228

1. Log on to the Gateway server as an administrator.

2. In Customizing for SAP NetWeaver, choose Gateway OData Channel Administration General Settings

SAP NetWeaver Gateway to SAP System Activate and Maintain Services  (or run transaction /IWFND/

MAINT_SERVICE).

3. On the Activate and Maintain Services screen, select Add Service.

4. On the Add Selected Services screen, enter the system alias name you created and press Enter.

5. In the External Service Name column, select the service ESJI_SD_SRV.

6. In the Add Service dialog, in the Creation Information group box, select a package.

7. Press F3 (Back).

8. Verify that OData ICF nodes are activated for all registered OData Services as follows:

○ In the service catalog, select the registered OData Service and, on the OData ICF  node, select ICF Node.

○ Select Activate and confirm the selection.

9. Save your entries.

SAIL on the SAP Gateway Server

The generic configuration tasks for configuring SAIL on the SAP Gateway server are described in chapter 4,

Configuring SAIL on the SAP Gateway Server, of the SAIL configuration guide Distributing SAP Gateway

Notifications to SAP Jam .

It is mandatory that you maintain the notification filter. This filter restricts the number of notifications that are

sent. You must specify the OData services for which notifications are to be sent to the service provider. Thefollowing views represent the notification filter:

● CLBV_GW_NOTIFY_S: Entries delivered by SAP

● CLBV_GW_NOTIFY_C: Customer-defined settings

The system, which decides whether a notification is sent, first checks if an entry exists in the C table for your

service provider type and OData service. If so, the S table is not taken into account. This means that entries in the

C table override the SAP defaults.

Use the values in the following procedure when completing section 4.3, Maintaining Notification Filter, of the SAIL

guide.

To activate the ESJI_SD_SRV OData service:

1. To customize SAP NetWeaver, choose  Application Server Basis Services Collaboration Gateway

Notifications Activate OData Service for Notification  (or call up view CLBV_GW_NOTIFY_C).

The Change View OData Service Settings for Notifications: Overview screen appears.

2. To activate notifications for the ESJI_SD_SRV OData service, complete the fields as follows:

Table 22: ESJI_SD_SRV OData service fields

Field Value

Serv. Provider Type Enter the service provider type, for example,Jam.

Ext. Srv. Name EnterESJI_SD_SRV.

136 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 137: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 137/228

Field Value

Send Notifications Select All Notifications.

Note

The Customizing filter entries are related to an external service name. This is the same name that has been

registered at the Gateway server (see "Configuring the ESJI_SD_SRV OData Service on the SAP Gateway

server" above).

3. Save your entries.

SAIL in the Application Back End

The generic configuration tasks for configuring SAIL in the application back end are described in chapter 5,

Configuring SAIL in the Application Back End, of the SAIL configuration guide Distributing SAP Gateway

Notifications to SAP Jam .

This section contains SD-specific information for defining the SD-specific entries in the OData service registry.

Registering the ESJI_SD_SRV OData Service

The Social Media ABAP Integration Library (SAIL) provides an OData service registry as a reuse component for

SAP applications. The registry allows you to define a subset of OData services that can be exposed in a specific

application context to external or on-demand platforms. In contrast to the notification filter, the service registry is

not integrated into the Gateway or SAIL part of the notification process. It represents an independent service that

applications can use. There are the following use cases:

● Supply OData URIs that are part of the notification. For example, OData URIs for addressing the annotation

resource.

● Supply resource URL of the OData service for a subscription (base URL). The metadata link is implicitly

derived from this base URL.

Use the values in the following procedure when completing section 5.5.1, Defining OData Service Registry, of the

SAIL guide.

To register the ESJI_SD_SRV OData Service:

1. In Customizing for SAP NetWeaver, choose  Application Server Basis Services Collaboration Gateway

Notifications Define OData Service Registry  (or run transaction CLB_GW_SRV_C).

2. On the Change View Services: Overview screen, select New Entries.

3. Enter the following:

Table 23: CLB_GW_SRV_C new entries

Field Value

Bus. Object Type The Business Object Type is mandatory to determine your business context.

 Appl. Context EnterECC_OTC.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 137

Page 138: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 138/228

Field Value

Ext. Srv. Name EnterESJI_SD_SRV.

The value must correspond to an entry in Customizing for the Gateway server (See Customizing

for SAP NetWeaver under Gateway Service Enablement Service Development for Backend

OData Channel Maintain Services ).

OData services delivered by the SAP NetWeaver Gateway have the following format:

/sap/opu/odata/{NAMESPACE}/{SERVICE}/{COLLECTION}/

Request URI Enter the static part of the OData service.

OData services delivered by the SAP NetWeaver Gateway have the following format:

/sap/opu/odata/{NAMESPACE}/{SERVICE}/{COLLECTION}/

4. Save your entries.

Note

○ The service registry can be evaluated by calling method IF_CLB_CUST_QUERIES~

GET_REGISTRY_SERVICES_BY_PTYPE( ). In this convenience method, the internal URI prefix for

addressing the Gateway system is added from the information that has been maintained in the

Customizing activity Server Settings through the Gateway server’s RFC destination.

This means applications calling the method IF_CLB_CUST_QUERIES~

GET_REGISTRY_SERVICES_BY_PTYPE( ) must not add the URI prefix to the Request URI field of the

view cluster.

○ Applications can also call IF_CLB_CUST_GW_SRV~GET_SERVICES_BY_PTYPE directly. This access

class returns the Customizing content as it is, without adding the URI prefix.

To maintain the ESJI_SD_SRV OData Service:

In this step, you customize the ESJI_SD_SRV OData service.

1. Run transaction SM31.

2. Open view CLBV_APPLI_CONT, and check for the following entries:

○ ECC_OTC - ECC Order To Cash Scenario

○ SAIL - Social Media ABAP Integration Library (Default)

3. Open view CLBV_APPLI_PLATF, and check for the following entries:

○ Application ID: SAIL

○ Service Provider Type: Jam

○ Server: Jam productive

4. Open view CLBV_GW_SRV_C, and check for the following entries in the OData service registry.

Table 24: OData service registry entries

Business Object

Type

External Service

Name

OData Request URI

BUS2032 ESJI_SD_SRV /sap/opu/odata/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV;o=<SAP System Alias>/

BUS2032/ANNO ESJI_SD_SRV /sap/opu/ODATA/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV;o=<SAP System Alias>/

AnnotationCollection('x')/Content/$value

138 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 139: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 139/228

Business Object

Type

External Service

Name

OData Request URI

BUS2037 ESJI_SD_SRV /sap/opu/odata/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV;o=<SAP System Alias>/

BUS2037/ANNO ESJI_SD_SRV /sap/opu/ODATA/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV;o=<SAP System Alias>/

AnnotationCollection('x')/Content/$value

BUS2031 ESJI_SD_SRV /sap/opu/odata/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV;o=<SAP System Alias>/

BUS2031/ANNO ESJI_SD_SRV /sap/opu/ODATA/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV;o=<SAP System Alias>/

AnnotationCollection('x')/Content/$value

KNA1_ESJI ESJI_SD_SRV /sap/opu/odata/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV;o=<SAP System Alias>/

KNA1_ESJI/

ANNO

ESJI_SD_SRV /sap/opu/ODATA/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV;o=<SAP System Alias>/

AnnotationCollection('x')/Content/$value

LIKP ESJI_SD_SRV /sap/opu/ODATA/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV;o=<SAP System Alias>/

LIKP/ANNO ESJI_SD_SRV /sap/opu/ODATA/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV;o=<SAP System Alias>/

AnnotationCollection('x')/Content/$value

Note

The variable <SAP System Alias> in the table refers to the system alias of the back end you created

earlier as described in section 3.3, Creating System Alias for Application Systems, of the SAIL guide

Distributing SAP Gateway Notifications to SAP Jam .

5. In the Application Context field, enter ECC_OTC.

6. Open view CLBV_SERV_PTYPE_C, and enter the ODATA Service UUID of the services you have maintained inthe view CLBV_GW_SRV_C.

Note

○ You can retrieve the OData Service UUID by double clicking on the entry maintained in view

CLBV_GW_SRV_C. You can copy the service UUID and register the service provider type as Jam for the

services you have added in the view CLBV_GW_SRV_C.

○ Similarly, open view CLBV_SRV_PTYPE_S, and verify that the service provider is Jam for the services

maintained in the view CLBV_GW_SRV_S.

Set up required access and authorization

These procedures establish the access and authorization configurations in SAP Jam that are required for the

integration of SAP ECC (SD):

● Add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156] if your network uses unrecognized or self-signed HTTP with

TLS or SSL certificates.

● Add an OAuth Client [page 158] to configure an authorized entry point for SAP ECC (SD) to initiate requests

to the SAP Jam API in order to display SAP Jam content in SAP ECC (SD).

● Add SAML Trusted IDPs [page 161] to establish a trust relationship between SAP ECC (SD) and SAP Jam

that allows SAP ECC (SD) to use SAP Jam identity and authorization information, which ensures that SAP

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 139

Page 140: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 140/228

ECC (SD) users can only view the SAP Jam content that they are allowed to view when SAP Jam content is

displayed in SAP ECC (SD).

● Configure SAP Jam as a SAML Local Identity Provider [page 163] to establish a trust relationship between

SAP Jam and SAP ECC (SD) that allows SAP Jam to use SAP ECC (SD) identity and authorization information,which ensures that SAP Jam users can only view the SAP ECC (SD) content that they are allowed to view

when SAP ECC (SD) content is displayed in SAP Jam.

Register SAP ECC (SD) as an External Application in SAP Jam

Create an External Application entry to register your external SAP ECC (SD) application with SAP Jam. This

procedure is the required step in SAP Jam for setting up a secure data connection with your external business

application via the SAP NetWeaver Gateway.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  page is displayed. This initial page is a catalog of the external

applications that have been configured for your organization's SAP Jam instance.

2. Click Add Application.

A drop-down menu listing the available external application types is displayed.

Figure 101: Register SAP ECC (SD) in SAP Jam

3. Select SAP NetWeaver Gateway as the external application type that you want to add from the drop-down

menu.

140 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 141: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 141/228

4. Type in a meaningful name in the Name text box, such as one that names the external application and/or its

dedicated use.

Note

This name will appear in the SAP Jam navigation sidebar and in other locations in SAP Jam, so it is

important to make it something recognizable.

5. Select the Authentication Type.

○ Use the Common user option for testing and development purposes only.

Figure 102: Common user options

For the Common user option, set the following:

1. User name: This is the user name of the generic user account that will be used to access the service

on behalf of all of the SAP Jam users.

2. Password: This is the password of the generic user account that will be used to access the service on

behalf of all of the SAP Jam users.

In the Common User authentication mode, all access from SAP Jam to the external data source will be

made through an HTTP Basic authentication call using the provided user credentials. This isrecommended only if you wish to expose all of the data in the data source to all SAP Jam users in your

company. In other words, ensure that all the data exposed through the application can be considered

"public" within your company.

○ Use the Per user option for production systems.

Figure 103: Per user options

For the Per user option, set the following:

1. OAuth 2.0 Client Id: Your organization's client ID with your OAuth 2.0 SSO provider.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 141

Page 142: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 142/228

2. Secret: Your organization's OAuth 2.0 SSO secret.

3. Service Provider: The URL of your organization's OAuth 2.0 SSO provider, set in three parts: protocol,

host, and port number.

4. Service Provider Name: The name of your organization's OAuth 2.0 SSO provider.

5. Scope: Your organization's company name as set in SAP Jam. This can be found in the  Jam Admin

General  page.

In the Per-User authentication mode, SAP Jam authenticates the current user against the external

application through the OAuth 2.0 SAML bearer assertion work flow. Since SAP Jam delegates its user

authentication to SuccessFactors Platform, a trust relationship must first be established between the

external application and the SuccessFactors Platform. Once this relationship is established, an OAuth

client for SAP Jam is configured in the external application, using the SuccessFactors Platform IDP as the

issuer of identity assertions for the client.

When an SAP Jam user attempts to access the external data source, Jam will first post a SAML assertion

on the user's identity to the external object in exchange for an OAuth token for that user. If successful,

SAP Jam will use this OAuth token for all subsequent data access on behalf of that user.

More detail can be found at: http://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-oauth-saml2-bearer-20 .

6. Set the NetWeaver Client Id.

This is the three-digit login parameter for your NetWeaver client.

Figure 104: The Add External Application dialog box, latter options

7. Optionally, Select Trusted OAuth Client from the drop-down menu.

This is required if you want the external application, which supplies the business records, to be able to post

feed updates in SAP Jam.

8. Select the source of the SAML assertion provided by SAP Jam from the drop-down menu.

The default for this option is SAP Jam, but you can select SuccessFactors Foundation. This should be set to

match the source that you use to supply your user identity information.

9. Click Save.

You are returned to the  Jam Admin External Applications  page, where the list of external applications

that have been added is displayed, now including the external application that you have just registered.

Register SAP ECC (SD) business records in SAP Jam

Once you have completed the required configuration to access your external application from SAP Jam, you need

to further configure it by adding the particular business records objects that you want to access.

142 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 143: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 143/228

To register business records:

1. In the  Admin console External Applications  section, click on Action beside the OData application for

which you want to add objects and select Manage Record Types from the context menu.

The Manage Record Types screen is displayed for that application.

2. Click Add Record.

The Add Object dialog box is displayed.

Figure 105: The Add Record Type dialog box

3. In the Name field, enter a meaningful name for the object that you want to add.

4. Enter the External Type and Annotation for the type of object that you want to add.

The External Type must be the URL to OData metadata EntityType of the record that you are adding; the

 Annotation must be the URL to the OData annotations file, which describes how the incoming data will be laid

out in a graphical element of the UI. These entries differ for each Application Type and record type that you

want to display:

For access to both SAP ECC (SD) and CRM business records, add the business records for each of the CRM

object types—CorporateAccount, IndividualAccount, Opportunity, and Service Request—as shown in the "For

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 143

Page 144: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 144/228

a CRM-only via NetWeaver Gateway integration" section immediately above. Add the following ECC (SD)

business records to the same External Application for which you registered the CRM business record types:

○ For an ECC Customer Collection business record, enter:

External Type:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV/$metadata#CustomerCollection

 Annotation:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV/AnnotationCollection('x')/Content/$value

○ For an ECC Sales Order Collection business record, enter:

External Type:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV/$metadata#SalesOrderCollection

 Annotation:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV/AnnotationCollection('x')/Content/$value

○ For an ECC Invoice Collection business record, enter:

External Type:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV/$metadata#InvoiceCollection

 Annotation:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/sap/ESJI_SD_SRV/AnnotationCollection('x')/Content/$value

○ For an ECC Quotation business record, enter:

External Type:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/$metadata#QuotationCollection

 Annotation:

https://<gateway>/sap/opu/odata/CRMSWI01/CRMSMI_SRV/AnnotationCollection('x')/Content/ 

$value

In the above examples, the External Type URLs are fixed except for the host domain. For the Annotation URLs,

however, the actual URL will depend on where you have placed your annotation XML file; whatever the URL is,

it must return the appropriate annotation file.

5. Select the language or languages that the imported record will be displayed in by clicking Add Language and

checking the check box in front of each language that you want the data displayed in.

The selected language or languages will appear above the  Add Language button. Click the "X" on the right side

of any language button to remove it. Note that the first language listed will always be the "Primary" language.

6. Select Import External Resources to import the data using the URLs listed above.

SAP Jam will attempt to import the indicated resources, and it will display a message indicating the success

or failure of the import, and information on the cause of a failure if one occurs and the cause can be

determined.

7. Select Can be featured or unfeatured in groups to enable this option.

144 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 145: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 145/228

8. Select Can be primary object in top-level group to enable this option.

9. Select Can be primary object in subgroup to enable this option.

10. Select Filter Feed to enable users to add or remove feed entries of this object type.

11. Select Feed History to see the feed history independently of follows, which means:

○ If disabled, the user will only see the subset of feed items that were routed to their home feed; that is, they

will only see items which had a distribution list that included them, or items in which the user was at-

mentioned.

○ If enabled, and if authorization is successful, the user will see the full feed for the object, including items

that would otherwise not be visible to them.

12. Select Show Search to enable keyword searching in the business data browser.

When rendering a list of External Objects, SAP Jam may also show a "search" box. If this option is selected,

you can also set:

○ In the Hint field, you can enter a display string that tells the user what field the search is performed on.

○ In the Property field, you can enter the actual OData property name that the search is performed on.

Internally, Jam will make a [GET] request to the OData collection for the given object type, using an OData

$filter expression on the Property specified in the configuration screen. For example:

[GET] <OData Service Root>/ObjectCollection?$filter=startswith('text',Property)

13. Select Can be mentioned in feed posts to enable this option. If this option is selected, you can also set:

○ Primary (Search) Property: enter the OData property name that an at-mention look-up will search for.

○ Secondary (Display) Property: enter the OData property name that an at-mention look-up will display.

14. Once you have configured the record to your satisfaction, click Save.

You are returned to the <External_App_Name> Record Types catalog, and the record type that you just added

will be listed in the table.

Note

Next:

You can now, optionally, add an External Application Object Filter [page 153] to narrow the range of data

shown in a particular external application data object.

Additionally, you can now, optionally, add an External Application Object Sort Order [page 154] to set the

order in which the external data is arranged in a particular external application data object.

If you do not want or need to add Filters or Sort Fields to your External Application Objects, you can proceed to

Configure access to business records in SAP Jam [page 155].

4.2.4 Integrate SAP Cloud for Customer

Integration of SAP Jam with your SAP Cloud for Customer solution enables cross-application collaboration using

the SAP Jam feed, and allows users to feature SAP Cloud for Customer accounts, opportunities, products, and

service tickets in SAP Jam groups.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 145

Page 146: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 146/228

Prerequisites

SAP Jam: An SAP Jam tenant has been provisioned for your company, and you have been given administratoraccess. You know how your users were provisioned for your SAP Jam system.

SAP Cloud for Customer: Initial setup and configuration has been performed in tenant, as per the SAP Cloud for

Customer Administrator Guide. You have administrator access and know how your users were provisioned for

your SAP Cloud for Customer system.

Cross-system authentication: If your user IDs or your user email addresses are identical in both SAP Jam and

SAP Cloud for Customer (C4C), then you can use dynamic onboarding and there is no explicit user mapping

needed. If neither of these conditions are true, the you will not be able to use dynamic onboarding and explicit user

mapping will be required.

While the SAP C4C user ID is used as the logon user ID, the SAP Jam user ID is not. The SAP Jam user ID must be

in uppercase and less than 40 characters for this integration to work without explicit user mapping.

Using users' email addresses as the key identifier means that your SAP C4C and SAP Jam are using the email

address for back-end authentication during API calls. It does not necessarily mean users are logging in with their

email address.

Integration Steps: To successfully integrate SAP Jam with SAP Cloud for Customer, please refer to the document

INTEGRATION: SAP Cloud for Customer + SAP Jam, which can be found in https://websmp202.sap-ag.de/

cloud4customer . This document contains complete instructions for integrating SAP Cloud for Customer with

SAP Jam.

4.2.5 Integrate SuccessFactors Learning

In your SuccessFactors HCM Suite, gather the OAuth token information that you will need to enter in your SAP

Jam configuration.

Gather SuccessFactors Learning OAuth token information

The first procedure in setting up your SuccessFactors Learning integration with SAP Jam is to configure the

SuccessFactors HCM Suite to work with your SAP Jam service.

To configure the SuccessFactors HCM Suite, do the following:

1. Log in to the SuccessFactors HCM Suite and select Admin Center from the main menu.

2. Click the Learning icon in the Company Processes & Cycles panel, and select Learning Administration from the

context menu.

The Learning Administration section is displayed.

3. Enable the integration of SuccessFactors LMS and SAP Jam by clicking the System Admin icon from the top

menu bar, expanding the Configuration section in the left sidebar, and click System Configuration.

The LMS_ADMIN configuration file is displayed.

146 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 147: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 147/228

Figure 106: SuccessFactors Learning Administration > System Admin > Configuration > System Configuration

4. Search in the LMS_ADMIN configuration file for "jamIntegrationEnabled", ensure that it is set to "true", and

click Apply Changes.

5. Gather the OAuth information that will be required for your SAP Jam configuration, which is also available in

the System Admin Configuration  section by clicking OAuth Token Server.

A page of the OAuth Token Server information is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 147

Page 148: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 148/228

Figure 107: SuccessFactors Learning Administration > System Admin > Configuration > OAuth Token Server

6. Click the Generate a new client secret button.

A new field is displayed underneath the Client ID field, labeled Newly Generate Client Secret.

Note

You can generate a new client secret at any time, but it is the last generated client secret that you must

copy and paste into your SAP Jam configuration.

7. Copy and save the following information to add to your SAP Jam configuration:

○Client ID

○ Newly Generated Client Secret

Ensure that you fully copy the Client ID and the Newly Generated Client Secret. The text must be copied

exactly, without any spaces before or after.

Register SuccessFactors Learning as an External Application in SAP Jam

Create an External Application entry to register your external application with SAP Jam. This procedure is the

required step in SAP Jam for setting up a secure data connection with your external business application,

including integrations via SAP NetWeaver Gateway, via SAP HANA Cloud Platform, with SAP Cloud for Customer,

with a Third Party OData Source, or with SuccessFactors Learning.

148 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 149: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 149/228

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  page is displayed. This initial page is a catalog of the external

applications that have been configured for your organization's SAP Jam instance.

2. Click Add Application.A drop-down menu listing the available external application types is displayed.

Figure 108: Register SuccessFactors Learning in SAP Jam

3. Select the SuccessFactors Learning option.

The External Application, add a SuccessFactors Learning application form is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 149

Page 150: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 150/228

Figure 109: External Application, add a SuccessFactors Learning application form

4. Type in a meaningful name in the Name text box, such as one that names the external application and/or its

dedicated use.

Note

This name will appear in the SAP Jam navigation sidebar and in other locations in SAP Jam, so it is

important to make it something recognizable.

5. Set the following:

1. OAuth 2.0 Client Id: Enter the value from the OAuth Token Server page's Client ID field.

2. Secret: Enter the value from the OAuth Token Server page's Newly Generated Client Secret field.

3. Service Provider: Enter the fully-qualified domain name of your SuccessFactors Learning service. For

example, e0363.scdemo.successfactors.com

One way to determine this URL is to log in to SuccessFactors Learning on the web. Using Internet Explorer

browser, right click on the page and select "View Properties", and copy the base URL for the page; in

Chrome, right click "View frame info" and copy the base URL for the page. The base URL is everything

after the protocol https:// and before the next slash, which indicates the path.

4. Service Provider Name: This field is pre-filled and is not editable.SAP Jam establishes a trust relationship with SuccessFactors Learning via OAuth client certificate. SAP Jam

authenticates the current user against SuccessFactors Learning so they can view learning data in SAP Jam.

6. Click Save.

You are returned to the  Jam Admin External Applications  page, where the list of external applications

that have been added is displayed, now including the external application that you have just registered.

150 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 151: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 151/228

Register the SuccessFactors Learning business record in SAP Jam

Once you have completed the required configuration to access your external application from SAP Jam, you needto further configure it by adding the business records that you want to access. For SuccessFactors Learning, only

the "Item" business record type is currently supported.

To register business records:

1. In the  Admin console External Applications  section, click on Action beside the OData application for

which you want to add objects and select Manage Record Types from the context menu.

The Manage Record Types screen is displayed for that application.

2. Click Add Record.

The Add Record Type dialog box is displayed.

Figure 110: The Add Record Type dialog box

3. In the Name field, enter a meaningful name for the object that you want to add.

4. Note that the External Type and Annotation fields are pre-filled with static values and are read-only.

5.  Add Language: currently, only English (EN) is supported.

6. Select Import External Resources to import the data using the URLs listed above.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 151

Page 152: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 152/228

Note

To ensure a successful import of external resources, you—as the logged in Jam admin—must have a

corresponding account in SuccessFactors Learning, and you must also have access to the learning catalog.

SAP Jam will attempt to import the indicated resources, and it will display a message indicating the success

or failure of the import, and information on the cause of a failure if one occurs and the cause can be

determined.

7. Select Can be featured or unfeatured in groups to enable this option.

8. Select Can be primary object in top-level group to enable this option.

9. Select Can be primary object in subgroup to enable this option.

10. Select Filter Feed to enable users to add or remove feed entries of this object type.

11. Select Feed History to see the feed history independently of follows, which means:

○ If disabled, the user will only see the subset of feed items that were routed to their home feed; that is, they

will only see items which had a distribution list that included them, or items in which the user was at-

mentioned.

○ If enabled, and if authorization is successful, the user will see the full feed for the object, including items

that would otherwise not be visible to them.

12. Select Show Search to enable keyword searching in the business data browser.

When rendering a list of External Objects, SAP Jam may also show a "search" box. If this option is selected,

you can also set:

○ In the Hint field, you can enter a display string that tells the user what field the search is performed on.

○ In the Property field, you can enter the actual OData property name that the search is performed on.

Note

For SuccessFactors Learning, only "Title" is supported as the property of a search.

Internally, Jam will make a [GET] request to the OData collection for the given object type, using an OData

$filter expression on the Property specified in the configuration screen. For example:

[GET] <OData Service Root>/ObjectCollection?$filter=startswith('text',Property)

13. Note that the "Can be mentioned in feed posts" option is not currently supported for SuccessFactors Learning

integrations.

Note

Next: Unlike other business record integrations, a SuccessFactors Learning integration does not allow you to

set filtering, as the filtering is already done for you, giving access to SuccessFactors Learning "Instructor-Led",

"Online", and "Other Learning" courses.

Similarly, setting a sort order in which the external data is arranged in a particular external application data

object has no relevance.

As you do not set Filters or Sort Fields for your External Application Objects, you should proceed to Configure

access to business records in SAP Jam [page 155].

152 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 153: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 153/228

4.2.6 Configure a business record filter

This configuration sets a filter that narrows the range of data that is displayed in a business record. This allows

you to configure several instances of the same business record, each displaying a different set of data from that

business record and each of which can then be used in different groups. Note that some pre-configured External

Application business records include predefined filters.

To add an business record filter:

1. As an SAP Jam administrator, in the  Jam Admin External Applications  page, with the list of external

applications displayed, click on Action beside the external application to which you want to add an external

object filter, and select Manage Record Types from the context menu.

The Manage <External_Application> Record Types page is displayed.

2. Click Filters beside the object type to which you want to add a filter.

The Manage <record_type> (<External_Application>) Filters page is displayed.

3. Click New Filter.

The Manage <record_type> (<External_Application>) Filters add a new filter page is displayed.

Figure 111: Add a filter to a business record

4. In the Name field, enter a meaningful name for the filter that you want to add.

5. In the Filter field, enter the filter expression that you want to use.

6. Optionally, you can Enable the filter, which will make it immediately available.7. When you are done, click Submit.

You are returned to the Manage <record_type> (<External_Application>) Filters panel.

8. In the Manage <record_type> (<External_Application>) Filters panel, you can do the following:

○ Click true (or false) in the Enabled column to toggle the filter's enabled status.

○ Click Show Filter to view the text of the filter.

○ Click Delete Filter to remove the filter, including from future use.

○ Click Edit Filter or to modify an existing filter.

Note

Next:

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 153

Page 154: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 154/228

You can now, optionally, add an External Application Object Sort Order [page 154] to set the order in which the

external data is arranged in a particular external application data object.

If you do not want or need to add Sort Fields to your External Application Objects, you can proceed to Configure

access to business records in SAP Jam [page 155].

4.2.7 Configure a business record sort order

Each business record type contains a set of attributes that can be selected as the criteria by which the rows of

data are sorted in SAP Jam.

To set a business record sort order:

1. As an SAP Jam administrator, in the  Jam Admin External Applications  page, with the list of external

applications displayed, click on Action beside the external application for which you want to set sort fields, and

select Manage Record Types from the context menu.

The Manage <External_Application> Record Types page is displayed.

2. Click Sort Fields beside the object type to which you want to set the sort fields.

The Edit Record Type dialog box is displayed.

Figure 112: Add a sort order for a business record

3. Click Show Fields Hint to view the list of available fields.

A list of the available fields is displayed.

4. Copy and past the fields from the list of those available into the Sort Fields text box in the order in which you

want them displayed.

5. When the sort fields are listed in the order in which you want the business records sorted, click Update.

You are returned to the Manage <External_Application> Record Types page.

Note

Next: You can now proceed to Configure access to business records in SAP Jam [page 155].

154 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 155: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 155/228

4.2.8 Configure access to business records in SAP Jam

Once you have properly registered your external application, created any required annotations files, andregistered your business records, your external data will be available for use in SAP Jam. OData-based

applications are listed in the Business Records page. You can also configure SAP Jam to access your

organization's external content from other locations within SAP Jam.

● To create a group with a business record as its "Primary Object":

1. In your SAP Jam Home page, click Business Records, and click the name of the type of business record.

A list of business records of that type is displayed.

2. In the list of business records of that type, hover over the name of the particular business record that you

want to set as the primary object of a new group.

An information and actions dialog box is displayed for that business record

3. Click Create Group at the bottom of that dialog box.

A Create a Group dialog box is displayed.

4. Set the options that you want for the group, including:

○ Select the group template.

○ Enter a group name

○ Optionally, enter a description of the group.

○ Click to select the Group Permissions.

○ Click options beside the group permissions type for additional settings.

○ Ensure that the Activate this group now checkbox is selected if you want to allow immediate use of the

group.

○ Click Create to create the group.

● To "feature" a business record in a group:1. In your SAP Jam Home page, click Business Records, and click the name of the type of business record.

A list of business records of that type is displayed.

2. In the list of business records of that type, hover over the name of the particular business record that you

want to set as the primary object of a new group.

An information and actions dialog box is displayed for that business record.

3. Click Feature in... at the bottom of that dialog box.

A Feature in another group dialog box is displayed.

4. Enter the name of the group in which you want to feature the selected business record and click OK.

The selected business record is "featured" in the specified group.

● To have a business record appear as being "related" to a "Primary" or "Featured" business record:

This is done automatically, but it does require that the UI.LineItem Term has been developed.

Your Document Repository access configuration is now complete. Users can access the newly integrated

business records from any of the above listed SAP Jam locations that you configured.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 155

Page 156: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 156/228

4.3 Access and Authorization overview

This section explains the technologies used to establish SAP Jam integration access and authorization. The

following access and authorization work flows are described:

● Use SAP Jam's  Admin External Applications Trusted Certificate Authorities  section to configure

access to web-based applications and services within your organization if unrecognized or self-signed

certificates are used.

● Use SAP Jam's  Admin OAuth Clients  section to allow an external application to access the SAP Jam API

by configuring an OAuth Client.

● Use SAP Jam's  Admin SAML Trusted IDP  section to allow an external application to access SAP Jam

user ID and authorization information so that it will display only the material that a user is authorized to view

when SAP Jam features are integrated into the external application.

● Use SAP Jam's  Admin SAML Local Identity Provider  section to allow SAP Jam to access an external

application's user ID and authorization information so that it will display only the material that a user is

authorized to view when they view pages where integrated external application business records are

displayed in SAP Jam.

● Use SAP Jam's  Admin SAML Trusted IDP  section to configure an external service as your primary user

identity provider.

4.3.1 Add a Trusted Certificate Authority

If your organization's network uses unrecognized or self-signed certificates, then you must perform the following

steps for SAP Jam to accept the certificate, which will then allow SAP Jam access to the external application data.

Note that this can also be a good way to establish a secure connection to your document repositories via CMIS.

Note

Adding a trusted certificate authority disables the use of certificates in the default Certificate Authority store.

Therefore, if you add a trusted certificate authority, you must manually add all required Certificate Authorities

in this section of the Admin console.

1. To find the certificate to add to SAP Jam, you must open a page of the external application that you are trying

to integrate into SAP Jam in your browser and view the certificate.

The way that you do this will vary with each browser, so you must refer to your browser's documentation for

instructions.

2. Export the certificate into Base-64 encoded X.509 (.cer) format.

3. Open the exported certificate in a text editor and copy the entire certificate, including the "Begin Certificate"

and "End Certificate" lines.

4. Access the Admin console [page 11], select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar, and click

Trusted Certificate Authorities at the top of the page.

The Trusted Certificate Authorities dialog box is displayed.

5. Paste the copied certificate into the Trusted Certificate Authorities text box, and click Submit.

156 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 157: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 157/228

This registers the unrecognized certificate with SAP Jam, which will enable your connection to your external

application.

Figure 113: The add Trusted Certificate Authorities form

Note

Next: If you are integrating business records, proceed with one of the following:

● If you will be using the business records displayed in SAP Jam interactively, that is, if you want to be able to

make changes to the business data displayed in SAP Jam and have those changes communicated back to

the source external business application, then you must enable either OAuth or SAML authorizations by

performing one or both of the following procedures:

○ Proceed to Add an OAuth Client [page 158] if the connections from the external application to SAP

Jam require OAuth authorization.

○ Proceed to Add SAML Trusted IDPs [page 161] if the connections from the external application to SAP

Jam require SAML authorization.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 157

Page 158: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 158/228

4.3.2 Add an OAuth Client

To authorize an external application to access the SAP Jam API, you must register the external application as anOAuth client in the  Jam Admin OAuth Clients  section of the SAP Jam Admin console.

To manage OAuth Clients, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select OAuth Clients from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Jam Admin OAuth Clients  section is displayed.

Figure 114: OAuth Clients catalog

This page presents a catalog of previously configured OAuth Clients, with UI controls that allow you to View,

Edit, or Delete existing OAuth Clients, or to add a new OAuth client ( Add OAuth Client).

2. To add an OAuth client, click Add OAuth Client at the upper right corner of the page.

The Register a new OAuth Client page is displayed.

158 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 159: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 159/228

Figure 115: Register a new OAuth Client form

1. In the Name field, enter a meaningful name that will allow SAP Jam admins to recognize what the client is.

2. From the Feed Filtering drop-down menu, select either none or SAP CRM.

3. In the Integrator URL field, enter the URL to the client application's API metadata.4. In the Callback URL field, enter the callback URL for the client application's API calls.

5. In the Support URL field, enter the support URL for the client application's API.

6. In the X509 Certificate (Base64) text box, enter the Transport Layer Security (TLS; a.k.a. SSL) public key

certificate string for the client application's API access.

7. When all of the above settings are complete, click Save to save the record and establish the trust

relationship with the OAuth client application.

You are returned to the OAuth Clients page, with the OAuth client record that you just added listed in the

catalog.

3. To view the information for an OAuth client, click View on the row for the OAuth Client that you want to view.

An OAuth Client: <OAuth_client_name> page is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 159

Page 160: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 160/228

Figure 116: View the OAuth Client page

You can either modify the information by clicking Edit or return to the OAuth Clients page by clicking Back.

4. To edit an OAuth client record, either click Edit in the OAuth Clients page or in the OAuth Client:

<OAuth_client_name> page.

The Edit your OAuth Client page is displayed, which is effectively identical to the Register a new OAuth Client

page.

1. Make whatever changes are required.

2. Click Save to save your changes.

You are returned to the OAuth Clients page, with the modified OAuth client record that you just edited

listed in the catalog.

Note

Next:

If you are integrating business records into SAP Jam, you should do one of the following:

● Proceed to Add SAML Trusted IDPs [page 161] you will be using the business records displayed in SAP

Jam interactively, that is, if you want to be able to make changes to the business data displayed in SAP Jam

and have those changes communicated back to the source external business application, and the external

application requires SAML authorization.

160 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 161: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 161/228

4.3.3 Add SAML Trusted IDPs

To allow an external application to access SAP Jam user ID and authorization information so that it will displayonly the material that a user is authorized to view when SAP Jam features are integrated into the external

application, you must register the external application as a SAML trusted Identity Provider (IDP).

To manage SAML Trusted IDPs, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select SAML Trusted IDPs from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin SAML Trusted IDPs  section is displayed.

Figure 117: SAML Trusted IDPs catalog

This page presents a catalog of previously configured SAML Trusted IDPs, with UI controls that allow you to

View, Edit, or Delete existing SAML Trusted IDPs, or to register a new identity provider (Register your identity

 provider).

2. To add an identity provider, click Register your identity provider at the upper right corner of the page.The Register a new SAML Trusted Identity Provider page is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 161

Page 162: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 162/228

Figure 118: Register a new SAML Trusted Identity Provider form

1. Optionally, in the Metadata File field, enter the path to a downloaded SAML IDP metadata (configuration)

file or click Browse and navigate to the location of that file.

If you have such a file and perform this step, it will fill the configuration of this page and no further setting

changes should be required, so you can proceed to the final step of this procedure.

2. In the IDP ID field, enter the identifier of the external identity provider.

3. In the Single Sign-On URL field, enter the URL used for single sign-on (SSO) with the identity provider

(IDP).

4. In the Single Log-Out URL field, enter the URL used for single log-out (SLO) with the identity provider

(IDP).

162 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 163: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 163/228

5. In the Default Name ID Format field, enter what name ID format is to be used in an authentication request.

6. In the Default Name ID Policy SP Name Qualifier field, enter the default Service Provider (SP) name

qualifier that is to be used in an authentication request.

7. From the Allowed Assertion Scope drop-down menu, select either Disable assertions or Users in mycompany.

8. In the X509 Certificate (Base64) text box, enter the Transport Layer Security (TLS) public key certificate

string for the client application's API access.

9. When all of the above settings are complete, click Save to save the record and establish the trust

relationship with the SAML Trusted IDP.

You are returned to the SAML Trusted IDPs page, with the SAML Trusted Identity Provider record that you

just added listed in the catalog.

3. To view the information for a SAML Trusted Identity Provider, click View on the row for the SAML Trusted

Identity Provider that you want to view.

A SAML trusted IDP: <SAML_trusted_IDP_name> page is displayed.

You can either modify the information by clicking Edit or return to the SAML Trusted IDPs page by clickingBack.

4. To edit a SAML Trusted IDP record, either click Edit in the SAML Trusted IDPs page or in the SAML trusted

IDP: <SAML_trusted_IDP_name> page.

The Edit your SAML Trusted Identity Provider page is displayed, which is effectively identical to the Register a

new SAML Trusted Identity Provider page.

1. Make whatever changes are required.

2. Click Save to save your changes.

You are returned to the SAML Trusted IDPs page, with the modified SAML Trusted Identity Provider

record that you just edited listed in the catalog.

4.3.4 Configure SAP Jam as a SAML Local Identity Provider

This procedure configures SAP Jam to allow it to access an external application's user ID and authorization

information so that it will display only the material that a user is authorized to view when they view pages where

integrated external application business records are displayed in SAP Jam.

To configure SAP Jam as a SAML identity provider, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select SAML Local Identity Provider from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin SAML Local Identity Provider  page is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 163

Page 164: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 164/228

Figure 119: SAML Local Identity Provider page, blank

The Issuer field contains the URI that shows the issuer's identity, in this case, your company's SAP Jaminstance.

2. Click Generate Key Pair to automatically fill the Signing Private Key and X509 Certificate text boxes.

164 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 165: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 165/228

Figure 120: SAML Local Identity Provider page, filled

The two text boxes are automatically filled with the signing private key and the X509 certificate (in base64format), that are required.

3. Copy the information in these three fields to configure SAP Jam as the SAML identity provider in an external

application to provide SAP Jam users with SSO access to the external applications.

4.4 Integrate document repositories

There are three types of integrations that will display the content of document repositories in SAP Jam:

● CMIS: Content Management Interoperability Services (CMIS) is an open standard that allows differentcontent management systems to inter-operate across a network. CMIS-compatible document repositories

include:

○ SharePoint 2013

○ SharePoint 2010

○ Alfresco One 4.2

○ SAP Extended ECM by OpenText

○ SAP Mobile Documents

CMIS-compatible document repositories can only be accessed by using a common user account for

credentials.

● Office 365 SharePoint Online Sites: This is a non-CMIS integration that uses Microsoft Azure's cloud

platform.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 165

Page 166: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 166/228

Office 365 SharePoint Online Site libraries can only by accessed using per-user credentials.

● Box: This is a non-CMIS integration that provides access to your organization's Box account as a document

repository.

While Box supports sharing files of many types, it is the document files that are the focus of SAP Jam's Boxintegration.

Note

SAP Jam uses a common user account for credentials when accessing a CMIS repository, only read-only

scenarios are supported. For example, uploading a document to a CMIS repository from SAP Jam is not

supported.

You must provide internet access to your CMIS repository for SAP Jam. To ensure that the configuration of this

access is secure, SAP strongly advises that you take the following precautions:

● Ensure that you use an HTTPS with TLS connection.

● Ensure that you Add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156] required to access the CMIS repositoryfrom SAP Jam.

● Configure a reverse proxy to provide SAP Jam with access to your document repository, and to deny

access from other clients.

Procedures required to integrate document repositories into SAP Jam

The procedures for integrating business records are listed below, and are illustrated in the diagram that follows:

1. Perform any required preparations on the document repository application. This mostly involves

establishing trusted data communications with SAP Jam.

2. Add a Trusted Certificate Authority if your organization requires the use of unrecognized or self-signed

certificates. This allows your browser to use the HTTPS/TLS connection required to access the document

repository's data without obstruction.

3. Register the document repository or library application in SAP Jam. This mostly involves establishing

trusted data communications with the external application.

4. Register the individual document repositories or libraries that you want to expose for viewing in SAP Jam.

5. Optionally, federate SAP Jam documents search results into SharePoint searches.

Note that this is only available for SharePoint 2010 and 2013 integrations.

6. Add a document repository or library to a SAP Jam group and your group members will be able to view and

discuss the external documents in SAP Jam.

166 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 167: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 167/228

Figure 121: Integrating document repositories work flow

Organization and coverage of these procedures in the SAP Jam Administrator

Guide

Procedure 1 (Perform any required preparations), procedure 3 (Register the external document repository

application in SAP Jam), and procedure 4 (Register the individual document repositories) in the above diagram

are documented together in per-application integration pages, as these sections involve substantial application-

specific information, and they are most clearly dealt with by combining these instructions in the following

sections:

● Integrate SharePoint 2010 or 2013 [page 171]

●Integrate Alfresco One 4.2 [page 179]

● Integrate SAP Extended ECM by OpenText [page 182]

● Integrate Office 365 SharePoint Sites [page 186]

● Integrate SAP Mobile Documents [page 190]

● Integrate Box [page 195]

● Integrate Google Drive [page 201]

The procedure for configuring access, which is procedure 2 (Add a Trusted Certificate Authority) in the above

diagram, is documented as a subsection of the preceding section on access and authorization:

● Add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156]

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 167

Page 168: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 168/228

Procedure 5 (Federating SAP Jam search results into SharePoint searches) is documented in the following

section and its three subsections:

● Federate SAP Jam search results into SharePoint searches [page 174]

○ Create an OpenSearch client in SAP Jam [page 175]

○ Configure SAP Jam as a federated search source in SharePoint [page 176]

○ Add the SAP Jam security certificate to SharePoint [page 177]

Now that all of the configuration steps are done, users can add business records to their groups, procedure 6

(Add the document repository or library to a SAP Jam group), which is described in two sections, as the

instructions are slightly different:

● Access document repositories in SAP Jam groups [page 203]

● Access Office 365 Online Sites in SAP Jam groups [page 204]

A preview of the Admin UI screens and the information required to integrate

External Applications

This section provides a quick preview of the SAP Jam Admin console pages in which the configuration procedures

are performed, and the information that is required in those pages, for the integration steps described in the per-

application integration pages listed above (procedures 4 and 6).

These SAP Jam Admin console pages and the required information to fill these forms are as follows:

● After the required configuration is done on the external document repository application, that application

must be registered in SAP Jam by Accessing the Admin console [page 11] and selecting External Applicationsfrom the left navigation sidebar, clicking Add Application, and then selecting the type of application that you

want to integrate from the drop-down menu.

168 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 169: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 169/228

Figure 122: Register the document repository application in SAP Jam

The available options for adding a business records application are:

○ SharePoint 2013

○ SharePoint 2010

○ Alfresco One 4.2

○ SAP Extended ECM by OpenText

○ SAP Mobile Documents

○ Microsoft Office 365

○ Box

○ Google Drive

When you select one of the above-listed document repository integration options, a page is displayed showing

a form for the fields and options required to establish a trusted data exchange between SAP Jam and either

the business application being integrated or the intermediary platform that is hosting the business

application. There is some variation in the fields of information that are required for these different options,

which are shown in the following diagram.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 169

Page 170: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 170/228

Figure 123: Add Application form options

● You must also Register each of the business records that you want to expose for use in SAP Jam. This page is

accessed by clicking on the Action menu in the row for the application in the External Applications main page

that you are integrating, and selecting Manage Record Types from the drop-down menu, and then clicking Add

Record Type.

Figure 124: The Add CMIS Repository or Document Library page

The options vary for some applications, which will be covered in the per-application integration instructions.

Note

Next: If you are ready to begin to integrate an external application's business records into SAP Jam, proceed to

the appropriate instructions:

● Integrate SharePoint 2010 or 2013 [page 171]

● Integrate Alfresco One 4.2 [page 179]

● Integrate SAP Extended ECM by OpenText [page 182]

● Integrate Office 365 SharePoint Sites [page 186]

● Integrate SAP Mobile Documents [page 190]

● Integrate Box [page 195]

● Integrate Google Drive [page 201]

170 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 171: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 171/228

4.4.1 Integrate SharePoint 2010 or 2013

Using the SAP Jam SharePoint Connector alternative

There is an alternate approach to integration to the advised SharePoint CMIS integration described in these pages. The

alternative is to install and configure the SAP Jam SharePoint Connector on the SharePoint server. Both approaches require

that configuration steps be performed in both SharePoint and SAP Jam, although installation is simpler for the CMIS

integration.

The CMIS integration is advised because it is more suitable for the common use case of organizations that have elected to

use SharePoint as their document repository, but who still want SharePoint documents to be available in SAP Jam to

facilitate discussions as an enterprise social networking application. Also, because of the suitability of CMIS integration, the

SAP Jam SharePoint Connector is no longer being actively developed.

Integration using the SAP Jam SharePoint Connector is still available. If you decide that you would like to try to integrate

SharePoint and SAP Jam using the SAP Jam SharePoint Connector, please contact your SAP Customer Support

representative and ask for the SAP Jam SharePoint Connector installer and the SAP Jam SharePoint Connector Installation

Guide.

Prepare for a SharePoint 2010 or 2013 integration

You must provide internet access to your CMIS repository for SAP Jam to be able to access it.

The SharePoint document repositories are accessed using Common User authentication. This means that all

access from SAP Jam to the external data source is made through an HTTP Basic authentication call using these

provided user credentials. This is recommended only if you wish to expose all of the data in the data source to all

SAP Jam users in your company. In other words, ensure that all the data exposed through the application can be

considered "public" within your company.

To ensure that the configuration of this access is secure, SAP strongly advises that you take the following

precautions:

● Ensure that you use an HTTPS with TLS connection.

● Ensure that you Add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156] required to access the CMIS repository to SAP

Jam.

● Configure a reverse proxy to provide SAP Jam with access to your document repository, and to deny access

from other clients.

Your SharePoint farm administrator must set up at least one generic user account for SAP Jam to provide and

control access to SharePoint documents. This common user must be included in the Access Control Lists for

SharePoint's document libraries, with read access rights. For SharePoint deployments behind the corporate

firewall, your IT department must open a port in your corporate firewall to enable this integration.

For SharePoint 2010, a CMIS-based integration with SAP Jam requires that the Microsoft CMIS Connector must

be installed. This is included in SharePoint 2013. Details for how to install the Microsoft CMIS Connector in

SharePoint 2010 are available at:

http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ff934619(v=office.14).aspx

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 171

Page 172: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 172/228

Register your SharePoint 2010 or 2013 application in SAP Jam

Create an External Application entry to register your SharePoint application with SAP Jam. This procedureestablishes a secure data connection between SAP Jam and your SharePoint application.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  section is displayed.

This initial page is a catalog of the external applications that have been configured for your organization's SAP

Jam instance.

Figure 125: Register the document repository application in SAP Jam

2. Click Add Application and select SharePoint 2013 or SharePoint 2010 from the drop-down menu.The form for adding a new external application is displayed.

3. In the Name text box, type in a meaningful name.

This name will appear in the SAP Jam navigation sidebar and in other locations in SAP Jam, so it helps to

make it something recognizable to your users.

4. In the User name text box, enter the user name of the common user account that will be used to access the

service on behalf of all SAP Jam users.

5. In the Password text box, enter the password of the common user account that will be used to access the

service on behalf of all SAP Jam users.

6. In the Service Document URL text box, enter the URL for the site, or site collection, that is housing the

document library or libraries that are to be integrated into SAP Jam.

See the notes below.

172 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 173: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 173/228

○ For a SharePoint 2013 integration: In SharePoint 2013, you can use the getRepositories call to

obtain the unique IDs of repositories for a given SharePoint site, so the Service Document URL must be in

a form similar to this: https://<host_domain>/_vti_bin/cmis/rest?getRepositories

○ For a SharePoint 2010 integration: Because SharePoint 2010 doesn't support getRepositories, therepository ID must be embedded in the URL, so the Service Document URL must be in a form similar to

this: https://<host_domain>/_vti_bin/cmis/rest/ab3c2eff-af65-4266-

bf37-3fcfab2f3273?getRepositoryInfo

To get the repository GUID for a SharePoint 2010 integration, go to Site Settings Site Library and

Lists  in SharePoint, click on the repository that you want, and note the GUID in the URL. This GUID must

be set in all lower case in the Service Document URL.

Note

For a SharePoint 2010 integration, you can click the ellipsis button to open a dialog box that aids in

setting the URL in the correct format by presenting a componentized entry form.

7. Click Save.

You are returned to the  Jam Admin External Applications  page, where the list of external applications

that have been added is displayed, now including the external application that you have just registered.

Note

If your organization uses unrecognized or self-signed certificates for network access, or if you want to ensure a

more secure connection to your document repository, you must add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156].

Note

At this point, if you have any trouble establishing a connection between SAP Jam and your SharePoint server,

you should work through the procedure Troubleshoot CMIS Connections [page 203].

Register the SharePoint document libraries

Once you have completed the required configuration to access your SharePoint application from SAP Jam, you

need to further configure it by adding the specific document libraries that you want to access.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  section is displayed.

2. Click on Action beside the SharePoint repository application for which you want to add access to document

repositories and select Manage CMIS Repositories from the context menu.

The <CMIS_service>: CMIS Repositories screen is displayed.

3. Click Add Repository and select either Use Custom Setting or Select from List.

Depending on the control that you selected, one of the following dialog boxes is displayed:

○ The Add CMIS Repository text entry dialog box

○ The Add CMIS Repository list selection dialog box

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 173

Page 174: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 174/228

Figure 126: The Add CMIS Repository or Document Library page

4. Set the document repository information by doing one of the following:

○ In the Add CMIS Repository text entry dialog box, enter the Name of the repository and the Repository Id.○ The Name is the name that will appear in the group navigation pane once group administrators set up

access to a given repository, so make this a name that will be recognize d by users in your

organization.

○ The Repository Id is found by navigating to the document repository, and looking at the browser URL.

The unique ID is found within the URL string.

CMIS is available on any on-premises SharePoint 2013 site only after the Content Management

Interoperability Services (CMIS) Producer feature is activated in the Manage Site Features section of

Site Settings.

For SharePoint 2010 integrations, navigate to Site Settings Site Library and Lists  click on the

repository you want, and note the GUID in the URL. Ensure that you use a lowercase version of the

GUID for the Repository Id.○ In the Add CMIS Repository list selection dialog box, click the CMIS repository that you want to add.

The listed repositories are retrieved from the CMIS server's base URL. Only the SharePoint 2013 option

will display multiple repositories.

5. Click Create.

The Add CMIS Repository dialog box will close, and the added repository will appear in the CMIS Repositories

page.

Note

Next: Once you have completed the registration of the document repositories or libraries that you want to be

able to access from within SAP Jam, you can proceed to Federate SAP Jam search results into SharePoint

searches [page 174].

If you do not choose to federate your search results, you can proceed to Access document repositories in SAP

Jam groups [page 203].

4.4.2 Federate SAP Jam search results into SharePointsearches

It is possible to federate SAP Jam Search results into OpenSearch-compliant search results. OpenSearch-

compliant document repositories include SharePoint 2010 and SharePoint 2013. This section documents the

174 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 175: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 175/228

procedures required to federate SAP Jam search results into Microsoft SharePoint. Note that these procedures

require administrator privileges on both the SAP Jam and SharePoint systems.

For more information on OpenSearch, see the OpenSearch web site .

Note

Authentication of an OpenSearch client with SAP Jam is done through a company-wide, single user username

and password; therefore, only the company-wide information available in SAP Jam "public groups" is available

in the federated search results.

To federate SAP Jam search results into SharePoint searches, perform the following three procedures.

4.4.2.1 Create an OpenSearch client in SAP Jam

The first task in setting up federated search with your Microsoft SharePoint server is to create an OpenSearch

Client entry in SAP Jam, which is described in the following procedure:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select OpenSearch Clients from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin OpenSearch Clients  section is displayed, showing a catalog of the existing OpenSearch

Clients, one client per row.

2. Click Add Client below the list of existing OpenSearch Clients.

A new row is added below the existing OpenSearch Clients. It contains a set of three text boxes.

Figure 127: OpenSearch Clients catalog

3. In the Description text box, enter a descriptive name for the client that you want to add, such as "SharePoint

2010 Documents".

4. In the Password text box, enter the password that you want the SharePoint system to use to access the SAP

Jam OpenSearch data.

5. In the Confirm text box, re-enter the password that you entered in the previous step.

Record this password for later use.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 175

Page 176: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 176/228

6. Click Save.

The row with the new OpenSearch client information is saved and displayed in the catalog along with any

existing OpenSearch clients, a random string is generated for the username, and that username is displayed

in the Username column of the OpenSearch Clients table.7. Record the username string from the newly created OpenSearch client instance, along with the password that

you set for use in SharePoint.

8. Click Download .osdx and save the file on your local drive.

Note

Next: You should now send the generated username, the password that you set, and the OSDX file that you

downloaded to your organization's SharePoint administrator. Your organization's should now Configure SAP

Jam as a federated search source in SharePoint [page 176].

4.4.2.2 Configure SAP Jam as a federated search source inSharePoint

To perform this task, you must have received three things from your organization's SAP Jam administrator:

● A generated username to use in the email address for access to the SAP Jam service's OpenSearch data

● The password for that user

● An OSDX file to use in configuring your organization's SAP Jam service as a source for OpenSearch federated

searches

The next task in setting up federated search with your Microsoft SharePoint server is to configure SAP Jam as a

Federated Search source in SharePoint, which is described in the following procedure:

1. On your organization's SharePoint server, as an administrator, open the Central Administration

 Application Management Manage Service Applications Search Service Application Federated

Locations  page.

The SharePoint Federated Locations page is displayed.

Figure 128: SharePoint Central Administration > Search Service Application > Manage Federated Locations

176 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 177: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 177/228

2. Click Import Location.

The SharePoint Import Federated Location page is displayed.

Figure 129: SharePoint Central Administration > Search Service Application > Import Federated Location

3. Click Browse and navigate to where the file is located on your local drive, select it, and import it.

The OSDX configuration information populates the fields in the Federated Locations page.

4. In the Common – Basic Authentication section of the same page, enter the username that you received from

your organization's SAP Jam administrator in the SAP Jam Common User field, and the password for that

user in the Password field.

5. Add SAP Jam as a federated location within the admin UI for setting up SharePoint Search Centers.

6. SharePoint 2010 also requires that you activate the CMIS feature on each document site that you connect to,

so on each document site in which you want to implement federated search, navigate to Home Site

Settings Features  and click Activate.

Figure 130: SharePoint Central Administration > Search Service > Federated Locations

Note

Next: You must now Add the SAP Jam security certificate to SharePoint [page 177].

4.4.2.3 Add the SAP Jam security certificate to SharePoint

In this final step in configuring federated search results from SAP Jam into SharePoint, the SharePoint

administrator must import the SAP Jam security certificate into SharePoint using the following procedure:

1. In the browser that you use to access your SAP Jam service, view your certificates, and among the VeriSign

certificates, and export the VeriSign Class 3 Secure Server CA -G3 certificate in DER encoded

binary X.509 format.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 177

Page 178: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 178/228

Figure 131: Export SAP Jam's VeriSign server certificate

2. On the SharePoint server, import the exported certificate file using the following SharePoint 2010 PowerShell

command:

New-SPTrustedRootAuthority -Name "VeriSign" -Certificate<path_and_filename_of_certificate_file>

For more information on this step, see http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ff607586.aspx .

3. Verify that SharePoint has successfully imported the security certificate by opening Central Administration

Security Manage Trust .

The VeriSign certificate should be listed.

Figure 132: Verify the SAP Jam certificate in SharePoint

With this configuration complete, user's searches in SharePoint will now include results from SAP Jam.

178 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 179: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 179/228

4.4.3 Integrate Alfresco One 4.2

Prepare for an Alfresco One 4.2 integration

Note

You must provide internet access to your CMIS repository for SAP Jam. To ensure that the configuration of this

access is secure, SAP strongly advises that you take the following precautions:

● Ensure that you use an HTTPS with TLS connection.

● Ensure that you Add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156] required to access the CMIS repository to

SAP Jam.

● Configure a reverse proxy to provide SAP Jam with access to your document repository, and to deny

access from other clients.

For an Alfresco One 4.2 integration, ensure that you have enabled the change log, which is documented below.

This small task is drawn from the Alfresco wiki's CMIS page , which you should refer to if you have any troubles

with your integration.

Enabling the Change Log

Note

Enabling the change log is a deprecated feature. This will be removed in the November, 2015, release.

Alfresco's implementation of the CMIS Change Log is an extension of the Auditing capabilities already available in

Alfresco. By default, the CMIS Change Log is disabled. You'll see this reflected in the CMIS Repository capabilities

where the value of capabilityChanges is none.

To enable the CMIS Change Log, the following configuration value must be set, either by setting it in alfresco-

 global.properties or in JMX (if available):

audit.cmischangelog.enabled=true

Once set, the value of capabilityChanges becomes objectidsonly. This means that the Alfresco Change Logprovides information on the objects that have changed (which have been created, updated, deleted, or had their

permissions modified), but it does not provide a list of the properties which have changed.

Register the external document repository application in SAP Jam

Create an External Application entry to register your external application with SAP Jam. This procedure is the

required first step in setting up a secure data connection with your external document repository.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  section is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 179

Page 180: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 180/228

Figure 133: Register the document repository application in SAP Jam

This initial page is a catalog of the external applications that have been configured for your organization's SAP

Jam instance.

2. Click Add Application and select the Alfresco One 4.2.

The form for adding a new external application is displayed.

3. In the Name text box, type in a meaningful name, such as one that names the external application and/or its

dedicated use.

This name will appear in the SAP Jam navigation sidebar and in other locations in SAP Jam, so it is important

to make it something recognizable.

4. Enter the User name and Password of the common user.

1. User name: This is the user name of the generic user account that will be used to access the service on

behalf of all SAP Jam users.

2. Password: This is the password of the generic user account that will be used to access the service on

behalf of all SAP Jam users.

With Common User authentication, all access from SAP Jam to the external data source is made through an

HTTP Basic authentication call using these provided user credentials. This is recommended only if you wish to

expose all of the data in the data source to all SAP Jam users in your company. In other words, ensure that all

the data exposed through the application can be considered "public" within your company.

5. Set the Service Document URL. This is the URL for the site or site collection that is housing the document

library or libraries that are to be integrated into SAP Jam. See the notes below. The Service Document URL

must be in a form similar to this: https://<host_domain>/alfresco/cmisatom

180 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 181: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 181/228

6. Click Save.

You are returned to the  Jam Admin External Applications  page, where the list of external applications

that have been added is displayed, now including the external application that you have just registered.

Note

If your organization uses unrecognized or self-signed certificates for network access, or if you want to ensure a

more secure connection to your document repository, you must add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156].

Note

At this point, if you have any trouble establishing a connection between SAP Jam and your SharePoint server,

you should work through the procedure Troubleshoot CMIS Connections [page 203].

Register the external document repositories or libraries

Once you have completed the required configuration to access your external application from SAP Jam, you need

to further configure it by adding the document repositories or document libraries, which are the specific sections

of content that you want to access.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  section is displayed.

2. Click on Action beside the Alfresco One 4.2 application for which you want to add access to document

repositories and select Manage CMIS Repositories from the context menu.

The <CMIS_service>: CMIS Repositories screen is displayed for that application.

3. Click Add Repository and select either Use Custom Setting or Select from List.

Depending on the control that you selected, one of the following dialog boxes is displayed:

○ The Add CMIS Repository text entry dialog box

○ The Add CMIS Repository list selection dialog box

Figure 134: The Add CMIS Repository or Document Library page

4. Set the document repository information by doing one of the following:

○ In the Add CMIS Repository text entry dialog box, enter the Name of the repository and the Repository Id.

○ The Name is the name that will appear in the group navigation pane once group administrators set up

access to a given repository, so make this a name that will be recognized by users in your

organization.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 181

Page 182: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 182/228

○ The Repository Id is found by navigating to the document repository, and looking at the browser URL.

The unique ID is found within the URL string.

○ In the Add CMIS Repository list selection dialog box, click the CMIS repository that you want to add.

The listed repositories are retrieved from the CMIS server's base URL. Only the SharePoint 2013 optionwill display multiple repositories.

5. Click Create.

The Add CMIS Repository dialog box will close, and the added repository will appear in the CMIS Repositories

page.

Note

Next: Once you have completed the registration of the document repositories or libraries that you want to be

able to access from within SAP Jam, you can proceed to Access document repositories in SAP Jam groups

[page 203].

4.4.4 Integrate SAP Extended ECM by OpenText

Prepare for an SAP Extended ECM by OpenText integration

Requirements

The following software, versions, and components must be installed to integrate SAP Enterprise ContentManagement document repositories with SAP Jam.

● Must be on a Windows or Linux based server.

● Must have Oracle or SQLServer installed.

● Must be SAP Extended ECM by OpenText 10.5, with the following components installed:

○ Deployment Scenarios

○ Content Server

○ Directory Services

○ Client Software

○ Additional Product Groups

○ Services Enterprise Library Server

Note

You must provide internet access to your CMIS repository for SAP Jam. To ensure that the configuration of this

access is secure, SAP strongly advises that you take the following precautions:

● Ensure that you use an HTTPS with TLS connection.

● Ensure that you Add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156] required to access the CMIS repository to

SAP Jam.

● Configure a reverse proxy to provide SAP Jam with access to your document repository, and to deny

access from other clients.

182 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 183: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 183/228

Note

Known Issue: Even a correct installation will return an HTTP 500 Status Message unless the required patches

are installed. The following procedure will guide you through the steps required to correct this issue.

Install the required patches and make the required configuration changes:

1. Download the required patch bundle.

Download Update Installer 10.5.0 - 2014.2. Revision 1050.2014.02.37 .

2. Install the patch.

Follow the instructions at https://knowledge.opentext.com/knowledge/piroot/ar/v100500/ar-dwg/en/

html/patchupdate-inst.htm , as the patch bundle requires you to change the Content Server connection

settings in the Archive Server configuration.

3. Run localhost/OTCS/cs.exe and follow the prompts.

4. Create a database user and database if required.

5. Connect the Content Server to the database.

6. After logging into the Content Server, install the Enterprise Library in Content Server Administrator Install

Modules .

7. Change the Member Service WSDL and Authentication Service WSDL in the OpenText Administration Client

from "localhost" to the IP address of the server.

8. Open Directory Services Resources .

1. Right-click on Content Server and select Edit.

2. Click Next twice, and ensure that the URLs use IP address instead of localhost.

9. Enable SSL for the OTCS endpoint and Tomcat.

Note

OpenText's implementation of CMIS has the following restrictions:

● Only exact file name matches are supported in searches.

● Search results may not be up-to-date. Results are only updated when the OpenText search indexing job is

run, which is controlled by the OpenText administrator.

Register the external document repository application in SAP Jam

Create an External Application entry to register your external application with SAP Jam. This procedure is the

required first step in setting up a secure data connection with your external document repository.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  section is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 183

Page 184: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 184/228

Figure 135: Register the document repository application in SAP Jam

This initial page is a catalog of the external applications that have been configured for your organization's SAP

Jam instance.

2. Click Add Application and select SAP Extended ECM by OpenText from the drop-down menu.

The form for adding a new external application is displayed.

3. In the Name text box, type in a meaningful name, such as one that names the external application and/or its

dedicated use.

This name will appear in the SAP Jam navigation sidebar and in other locations in SAP Jam, so it is important

to make it something recognizable.

4. Enter the User name and Password of the common user.

1. User name: This is the user name of the generic user account that will be used to access the service on

behalf of all SAP Jam users.

2. Password: This is the password of the generic user account that will be used to access the service on

behalf of all SAP Jam users.

With Common User authentication, all access from SAP Jam to the external data source is made through an

HTTP Basic authentication call using these provided user credentials. This is recommended only if you wish to

expose all of the data in the data source to all SAP Jam users in your company. In other words, ensure that all

the data exposed through the application can be considered "public" within your company.

5. Set the Service Document URL. This is the URL for the site or site collection that is housing the document

library or libraries that are to be integrated into SAP Jam.

6. Click Save.

184 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 185: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 185/228

You are returned to the  Jam Admin External Applications  page, where the list of external applications

that have been added is displayed, now including the external application that you have just registered.

Note

If your organization uses unrecognized or self-signed certificates for network access, or if you want to ensure a

more secure connection to your document repository, you must add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156].

Note

At this point, if you have any trouble establishing a connection between SAP Jam and your SharePoint server,

you should work through the procedure Troubleshoot CMIS Connections [page 203].

Register the external document repositories or libraries

Once you have completed the required configuration to access your external application from SAP Jam, you need

to further configure it by adding the document repositories or document libraries, which are the specific sections

of content that you want to access.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  section is displayed.

2. Click on Action beside the SAP Extended ECM by OpenText application for which you want to add access to

document repositories and select Manage CMIS Repositories from the context menu.

The <CMIS_service>: CMIS Repositories screen is displayed.

3. Click Add Repository and select either Use Custom Setting or Select from List.

Depending on the control that you selected, one of the following dialog boxes is displayed:

○ The Add CMIS Repository text entry dialog box

○ The Add CMIS Repository list selection dialog box

Figure 136: The Add CMIS Repository or Document Library page

4. Set the document repository or library information by doing one of the following:

○ In the Add CMIS Repository text entry dialog box, enter the Name of the repository and the Repository Id.

○ The Name is the name that will appear in the group navigation pane once group administrators set up

access to a given repository, so make this a name that will be recognized by users in your

organization.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 185

Page 186: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 186/228

○ The Repository Id is found by navigating to the document repository, and looking at the browser URL.

The unique ID is found within the URL string.

CMIS is available on any on-premises SharePoint 2013 site only after the Content Management

Interoperability Services (CMIS) Producer feature is activated in the Manage Site Features section ofSite Settings.

○ In the Add CMIS Repository list selection dialog box, click the CMIS repository that you want to add.

The listed repositories are retrieved from the CMIS server's base URL. Only the SharePoint 2013 option

will display multiple repositories.

5. Click Create.

The Add CMIS Repository dialog box will close, and the added repository will appear in the CMIS Repositories

page.

Note

Next: Once you have completed the registration of the document repositories or libraries that you want to be

able to access from within SAP Jam, you can proceed to Access document repositories in SAP Jam groups

[page 203].

4.4.5 Integrate Office 365 SharePoint Sites

Prepare for an Office 365 SharePoint Sites integration

This procedure involves configuring access to SAP Jam in Microsoft Azure.1. As your organization's Microsoft Azure administrator, log in to your Microsoft Azure account.

2. Ensure that your Microsoft Office 365 Tenant is added as a Directory in your Microsoft Azure account.

3. Under the Active Directory tab, click on your linked Microsoft Office 365 directory, click on  Applications, and

click Add.

A dialog box is displayed.

Figure 137: What do you want to do? dialog box

4. Click Add an application my organization is developing.

The second screen of the dialog box is displayed.

5. Enter the name of your application, select Web Application and/or Web API, and click the right-pointing arrow

to continue.

The third screen of the dialog box is displayed.

6. In both the Sign-On URL and the APP ID URI fields, enter the URL of your SAP Jam service, and click the check

mark in the lower-right corner of the dialog box.

186 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 187: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 187/228

Figure 138: App Properties dialog box

Your client application is created.

7. Click Configure, and in the configuration options set the following values:

1. In the keys section, create a new key and set the desired duration (1 or 2 years). You will be able to update

the key at any time.

Figure 139: keys configuration

2. In the single sign-on section, enter the APP ID URL, which is the base URL for your SAP Jam server, and

enter the REPLY URL, which must be in the form https://<jam_service_domain_name>/

office365/authorized.

Figure 140: single sign-on configuration

3. In the permissions to other applications section, set the following:

○ For Windows Azure Active Directory, select the Enable sign-on and read users' profiles (preview)

option in the Delegated Permissions drop-down menu.

Figure 141: Permissions to other applications configuration: Delegated Permissions options

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 187

Page 188: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 188/228

○ In the next row, add Office 365 SharePoint Online as the application, and select the Read items in all

 site collections (preview) and the Read users' files (preview) options in the Delegated Permissions

drop-down menu.

Figure 142: Permissions to other applications configuration: more Delegated Permissions options

4. In the bar at the bottom of the screen, click the Save icon.

When you save, the key value is displayed in the keys section.

Note

This is the ONLY TIME that the authorization key will be displayed, so you must copy it and save it as it

will be required later in your SAP Jam configuration.

8. Save the Client ID string, and save the authorization key that is displayed in the keys section of the

configuration screen.

These strings must be entered in your SAP Jam configuration for access to your Office 365 SharePoint Online

Sites.

Register the external document repository application in SAP Jam

Create an External Application entry to register your external application with SAP Jam. This procedure is the

required first step in setting up a secure data connection with your external document repository.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  section is displayed.

188 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 189: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 189/228

Figure 143: Register the document repository application in SAP Jam

This initial page is a catalog of the external applications that have been configured for your organization's SAP

Jam instance.

2. Click Add Application and select Microsoft Office 365 from the drop-down menu.

The form for adding a new external application is displayed.

3. In the Name text box, type in a meaningful name, such as one that names the external application and/or its

dedicated use.

This name will appear in the SAP Jam navigation sidebar and in other locations in SAP Jam, so it is important

to make it something recognizable.

4. Set the following options:

○ Top-Level Site URL This is your organization's SharePoint server's base URL.

○ OAuth 2.0 Client Id This is the string from the Client ID field in your Microsoft Azure configuration.

○ Secret This is the value that was displayed in the keys section when you saved your Microsoft Azure

configuration.

5. Click Save.

You are returned to the  Jam Admin External Applications  page, where the list of external applications

that have been added is displayed, now including the external application that you have just registered.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 189

Page 190: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 190/228

Note

Next: If your organization uses unrecognized or self-signed certificates for network access, or if you want to

ensure a more secure connection to your document repository, you must now add a Trusted CertificateAuthority [page 156].

Note that Box integrations do not require you to register document repositories, so you can proceed directory

to Access Office 365 Online Sites in SAP Jam groups [page 204].

4.4.6 Integrate SAP Mobile Documents

Prepare for an SAP Mobile Documents integration

To integrate SAP Mobile Documents into SAP Jam Collaboration, you must do the following:

1. Configure trust between SAP HANA Cloud Platform (hosting SAP Mobile Documents) and SuccessFactors

IDP by performing the procedures described in the SAP HANA Cloud Platform, Extension Package for

SuccessFactors Implementation Guide .

2. As an SAP Jam Collaboration administrator, access the Admin console [page 11] and select SAML Local

Identity Provider from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin SAML Local Identity Provider  page is displayed.3. If the X509 Certificate field is empty, click Generate Key Pair near the bottom of the page.

The key pair is generated. Click Save to store the generated keys for persistent use.

4. Copy the contents of both the Issuer field and the X509 Certificate field to add this information in the HANA

Cloud Platform configuration.

5. Log in to the SAP HANA Cloud Platform Cockpit, and select Trust in the left navigation menu.

The Trust Management page is displayed.

190 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 191: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 191/228

Figure 144: The SAP HANA Cloud Platform Cockpit, Trust Management page

6. Ensure that the Principal Propagation option is set to Enabled.

7. Click on the Trusted Identity Provider tab.

The Manage Trust Relationships and Federation Settings page is displayed.

Figure 145: The SAP HANA Cloud Platform Cockpit, Trust Identity Provider tab

8. Click Add Trusted Identity Provider.

The Add Trusted Identity Provider form is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 191

Page 192: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 192/228

Figure 146: The 797 HANA Cloud Platform Cockpit, Add Trusted Identity Provider form

9. In this form, do the following:

○ In the Name field, paste in the data that you copied from the Issuer field of the SAP Jam Collaboration

SAML Local Identity Provider page.○ Set the "Assertion Consumer Service" field to "Application Root".

○ In the Single Sign-on URL field, enter the URL of your SAP Jam Collaboration service's SAML service,

which should be in the form https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/saml/saml_acs where <jam#> is the

name of your SAP Jam Collaboration data center.

○ Set the Single Sign-on Binding field to HTTP-POST .

○ Set the Signature Algorithm field to SHA-1.

○ In the Signing Certificate field, paste in the data that you copied from the  X509 Certificate field of the SAP

Jam Collaboration SAML Local Identity Provider page.

○ Set the User ID Source field to subject.

○ Select the Enabled check box.

○ When you have all the fields set as required, click Save.

Do not set this new trusted IDP as the default. The default IDP should be the SuccessFactors Identity

Provider (IDP) system which is used for login.

Register the external document repository application in SAP Jam

Collaboration

Create an External Application entry to register your external application with SAP Jam Collaboration. This

procedure is the required first step in setting up a secure data connection with your external document

repository.

192 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 193: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 193/228

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  section is displayed.

Figure 147: Register the document repository application in SAP Jam Collaboration

This initial page is a catalog of the external applications that have been configured for your organization's SAP

Jam Collaboration instance.

2. Click Add Application and select SAP Mobile Documents (cloud version) from the drop-down menu.

The form for adding a new external application is displayed.

3. In the Name text box, type in a meaningful name, such as one that names the external application and/or its

dedicated use.

This name will appear in the SAP Jam Collaboration navigation sidebar and in other locations in SAP JamCollaboration, so it is important to make it something recognizable.

4. Set the Service Document URL. This is the URL for the site or site collection that is housing the document

library or libraries that are to be integrated into SAP Jam Collaboration.

5. Set the SAML Subject NameID source, which must be either SuccessFactors Foundation UserId (if your

organization's SAP Jam Collaboration instance is configured to use SuccessFactors IDP) or SAP Cloud

Identity User Identifier (if your organization's SAP Jam Collaboration instance is configured to use SAP IDS).

Do not use User Email.

6. Click Save.

You are returned to the  Jam Collaboration Admin External Applications  page, where the list of external

applications that have been added is displayed, now including the external application that you have just

registered.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 193

Page 194: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 194/228

Note

If your organization uses unrecognized or self-signed certificates for network access, or if you want to ensure a

more secure connection to your document repository, you must add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156].

Note

At this point, if you have any trouble establishing a connection between SAP Jam Collaboration and your

SharePoint server, you should work through the procedure Troubleshoot CMIS Connections [page 203].

Register the external document repositories or libraries

Once you have completed the required configuration to access your external application from SAP Jam

Collaboration, you need to further configure it by adding the document repositories or document libraries, which

are the specific sections of content that you want to access.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  section is displayed.

2. Click on Action beside the SAP Mobile Documents application for which you want to add access to document

repositories and select either Manage CMIS Repositories from the context menu.

The <CMIS_service>: CMIS Repositories screen is displayed for that application.

3. Click Add Repository and select either Use Custom Setting or Select from List.

Depending on the control that you selected, one of the following dialog boxes is displayed:

○ The Add CMIS Repository text entry dialog box

○ The Add CMIS Repository list selection dialog box

Figure 148: The Add CMIS Repository or Document Library page

4. Set the document repository or library information by doing one of the following:

○ In the Add CMIS Repository text entry dialog box, enter the Name of the repository and the Repository Id.

○ The Name is the name that will appear in the group navigation pane once group administrators set up

access to a given repository, so make this a name that will be recognized by users in your

organization.

○ The Repository Id is found by navigating to the document repository, and looking at the browser URL.

The unique ID is found within the URL string.

194 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 195: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 195/228

○ In the Add CMIS Repository list selection dialog box, click the CMIS repository that you want to add.

The listed repositories are retrieved from the CMIS server's base URL. Only the SharePoint 2013 option

will display multiple repositories.

5. Click Create.The Add CMIS Repository dialog box will close, and the added repository will appear in the CMIS Repositories

page.

Note

Next: Once you have completed the registration of the document repositories or libraries that you want to be

able to access from within SAP Jam Collaboration, you can proceed to Access document repositories in SAP

Jam groups [page 203].

4.4.7 Integrate Box

Prepare for a Box integration

Note

Box documents in integrated repositories can be viewed, commented on (with or without highlighting), or

downloaded. Other Box features, such as providing a direct link to a document, setting a link expiration, or

emailing a link to another user, are not available.

To prepare for a Box integration, you must do the following:

1. As an administrator for your organization's Box account, log in to the Box developers site.

This may be https://app.box.com/developers/services, or it may show your organization in the URL; for

example, https://mycorp.app.box.com/developers/services.

The BoxDeveloper home page is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 195

Page 196: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 196/228

Figure 149: The Box Developer home page

2. Click My Apps in the top bar.

If you have not created any apps before, a Create Your First App on Box page is displayed.

196 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 197: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 197/228

Figure 150: The Box My Applications page

3. Click Get Started to create your first Box application. If you have previously created an application, click

Create a Box Application near the top of the right sidebar.

The Create a Box Application page is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 197

Page 198: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 198/228

Figure 151: The Create a Box Application page

4. Enter a meaningful name in the text box, ensure that the Box Content radio button is selected, and clickCreate Application.

The Box Content Application Created page is displayed.

Figure 152: The Box Content Application Created page

198 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 199: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 199/228

5. Click Configure your application.

The Editing <your_organization>'s Box repository page is displayed.

This page contains many configuration options that are important to the functionality of your Box repository;

however, the majority of those options are beyond the scope and purpose of this document. The settings thatare important to this procedure are as follows:

○ In the General Information section, ensure that the Content API access Only radio button is selected.

○ In the OAuth2 Parameters section, set the redirect_uri in the form "https://jam#.sapjam.com/

box_files/authorized", where "#" is set to your SAP Jam data center number.

○ Also in the OAuth2 Parameters section, copy the following two fields of information to use in your SAP

Jam configuration:

○ client_id

○ client_secret

Figure 153: The Editing (your application) page's OAuth2 Parameters section

○ In the Backend Parameters section, again set the redirect_uri in the form "https://jam#.sapjam.com/

box_files/authorized", where "#" is set to your SAP Jam data center number.

6. Click Save Application.

Note

To ensure that SAP Jam access to integrated Box repositories works properly with Internet Explorer, you must

add two URLs, https://app.box.com and https://jam4.sapjam.com, in the Control Panel Internet

Options Security Trusted Sites  list on your users' computers.

Register the external document repository application in SAP Jam

Create an External Application entry to register your external application with SAP Jam. This procedure is the

required first step in setting up a secure data connection with your external document repository.

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  section is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 199

Page 200: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 200/228

Figure 154: Register the document repository application in SAP Jam

This initial page is a catalog of the external applications that have been configured for your organization's SAP

Jam instance.

2. Click Add Application and select Box from the drop-down menu.

The form for adding a new external application is displayed.

3. In the Name text box, type in a meaningful name, such as one that names the external application and/or its

dedicated use.

This name will appear in the SAP Jam navigation sidebar and in other locations in SAP Jam, so it is important

to make it something recognizable.

4. Set the following options:○ Top-Level Site URL This is the top-level URL that you used to access the Box Developer site in step 1 of the

Box preparation procedure.

○ OAuth 2.0 Client Id This is the client_id field that you copied in step 5 of the Box preparation procedure.

○ Secret This is the client_secret field that you copied in step 5 of the Box preparation procedure.

5. Click Save.

You are returned to the  Jam Admin External Applications  page, where the list of external applications

that have been added is displayed, now including the external application that you have just registered.

Note

If your organization uses unrecognized or self-signed certificates for network access, or if you want to ensure a

more secure connection to your document repository, you must add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156].

200 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 201: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 201/228

Note that Box integrations do not require you to register document repositories, so you can proceed directory

to Access document repositories in SAP Jam groups [page 203].

4.4.8 Integrate Google Drive

Prepare for a Google Drive integration

Note

Note that only one Google Drive can be added per company.

To integrate Google Drive, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select External Applications from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin External Applications  section is displayed.

Figure 155: Register the document repository application in SAP Jam

This initial page is a catalog of the external applications that have been configured for your organization's SAP

Jam instance.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 201

Page 202: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 202/228

2. Click Add Application and select Google Drive from the drop-down menu.

The form for integrating access to a Google Drive account displays.

Figure 156: The Google Drive account integration page

3. In the Name text box, type in a meaningful name.

This name will appear in the SAP Jam navigation sidebar and in other locations in SAP Jam, so it is important

to make it something recognizable.4. Optionally, select Use custom credential.

This option allows you to integrate an existing Google Drive account. If you do not select this option, a new

Google Drive account is created and accessed using your organization's own client ID and secret. If you do

select this option, you must fill in the following two fields:

○ OAuth 2.0 Client Id: This is the client_id field that you used to create your existing Google Drive account.

○ Secret: This is the client_secret that was provided when you created your existing Google Drive account.

5. Click Save.

You are returned to the  Jam Admin External Applications  page, where the list of external applications

that have been added displays, now including the Google Drive account that you just registered.

Note

If your organization uses unrecognized or self-signed certificates for network access, or if you want to ensure a

more secure connection to your document repository, you must add a Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156].

Note that Box integrations do not require you to register document repositories, so you can proceed directly to

Access document repositories in SAP Jam groups [page 203].

202 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 203: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 203/228

4.4.9 Troubleshoot CMIS Connections

The most common problem in establishing a connection between SAP Jam and a CMIS document repositoryinvolves Transport Layer Security (TLS, a.k.a. SSL) public key certificates. This procedure describes how to

identify this problem, and how to resolve it even if the optimum solution is not possible.

1. Download the open source tool to analyze your connection by going to http://chemistry.apache.org/java/

download.html .

Click Download beside OpenCMIS Workbench.

2. Install OpenCMIS Workbench and run it using the Service Document URL, User name, and Password that you

set in the previous procedure.

Form more information on using Apache's OpenCMIS Workbench, see Connecting to a repository  in the

Apache site documentation.

3. When the Workbench establishes a connection, click on the repository that you want to view in the Load

Repositories area, and click Login.The CMIS Workbench information for the selected repository is displayed, as is shown in the following

screencapture.

Figure 157: OpenCMIS Workbench

4. Find the reason that your connection is failing.

○ If the failure is due to NTLM authentication being required, note that SAP Jam only supports BASIC

authentication.

○ If the failure is due to an unrecognized TLS public key certificate being used by your document repository

application, note that by default SAP Jam only supports certificates from recognized Certificate

Authorities.

○ If your organization requires the use of unrecognized, self-signed certificates, then you must Add a

Trusted Certificate Authority [page 156].

4.4.10 Access document repositories in SAP Jam groups

Once you have properly registered your external application and registered your document repositories or

libraries for SharePoint 2013, SharePoint 2010, Alfresco One 4.2, SAP Extended ECM by OpenText, SAP Mobile

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 203

Page 204: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 204/228

Documents, or Box (Box doesn't require that you registered document repositories) you must configure SAP Jam

groups to access that external content from within SAP Jam groups.

To configure access to a document repository or library from within an SAP Jam group:

1. As a group administrator, from within the group in which you want to add access to a document library or

repository, click Group Admin and select Edit Group from the drop-down menu.

The Edit Group page is displayed.

2. In the Edit Group page, select the Setup tab.

3. Scroll down to the section for your SharePoint 2013, SharePoint 2010, Alfresco One 4.2, SAP Extended

ECM by OpenText, SAP Mobile Documents, or Box service and click Add External Folder.

An Add External Folder dialog box is displayed.

4. In the Add External Folder dialog box, click Select a Repository, and select the document repository or library

that you want to add access to from the drop-down menu.

A second drop-down menu appears.

5. From the secondary drop-down menu, select the document repository folder that you want to have access tofrom within your SAP Jam group, and click Add.

The Add External Folder dialog box is closed, and you return to the Edit Group page.

6. At the bottom of the Edit Group page, click Save changes.

You are returned to the group overview page, and the document repository that you configured access to

appears in the left navigation sidebar with the title of SAP Extended ECM by OpenText, SharePoint 2013,

SharePoint 2010, or Alfresco One 4.2. Note that the above procedure can be repeated to add access to as

many repository folders as you want to have access to.

Your Document Repository access configuration is now complete. Users can click on the <repository_name>

option in the left navigation sidebar, which will display a list of the available document repositories. While this

access is "read-only", user can comment on, annotate, and like the documents. Also, you can easily copy the

displayed document repositories to other groups.

4.4.11 Access Office 365 Online Sites in SAP Jam groups

To configure access to an Office 365 SharePoint Online Sites document library from within an SAP Jam group,

access to Office 365 SharePoint Online Sites document libraries must first have been configured in the  Admin

External Applications  page.

1. As a group administrator, from within the group in which you want to add access to an Office 365 SharePoint

Online Sites document library, click Group Admin and select Edit from the drop-down menu.The Edit Group page is displayed.

2. In the Edit Group page, select the Setup tab.

3. Scroll down to the section for your Office 365 SharePoint Online Sites service and click Add External Folder.

An Add External Folder dialog box is displayed.

4. In the Add External Folder dialog box, click Select a Document Library, and select the document library that

you want to add access to in the group from the drop-down menu.

A second drop-down menu appears.

5. From the secondary drop-down menu, select the document library folder that you want to have access to in

your SAP Jam group, and click Add.

204 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 205: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 205/228

Figure 158: Add External Folder dialog box

The Add External Folder dialog box is closed, and you return to the Edit Group page.

6. At the bottom of the Edit Group page, click Save changes.

You are returned to the group overview page, and the document library that you configured access to appears

in the left navigation sidebar with the title of Microsoft Office 365. Note that the above procedure can be

repeated to add access to as many document library folders as you want to have access to, although each of

these must be added separately.

Note

Ensure that your Internet Explorer users have added the following sites to their list of Trusted Sites:

● https://login.microsoftonline.com

● https://login.windows.net

To do this, have your users follow the Add or remove a site from a security zone instruction in the Security

zones part of the page http://windows.microsoft.com/en-CA/internet-explorer/ie-security-privacy-

settings#ie=ie-11 , in the Trusted sites option in the Security tab.

Your Microsoft Office 365 SharePoint Online Sites Document Library access configuration is now complete. Users

can click on the Microsoft Office 365 option in the left navigation sidebar, which will display a list of the available

Microsoft Office 365 document repositories. While this is "read-only" access, user can comment on, annotate, and

like the documents. Also, you can easily copy the displayed document repositories to other groups.

4.5 Add an OpenSocial Gadget

OpenSocial gadgets provide a mechanism to extend SAP Jam's abilities to interact with any software or service.

OpenSocial gadgets can be developed by programmers in your team, as is described in the SAP Jam OpenSocial

Gadgets section of the SAP Jam Developer Guide, or you can download existing OpenSocial gadgets from the SAP

Jam Sample Code GitHub  site's OpenSocial Gadgets  section.

Note

For any OpenSocial gadget, there may be risks involved in the exposure of data to external sources. Any data

that is stored for use in the operation of the gadget in an external data store will be available to that external

user or organization. For example, marking a location on a Google Map stores the data related to that marker

that can be accessed by Google. Similarly, if a third-party survey gadget is added, the organization that

provided the gadget will have access to the responses to the survey.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 205

Page 206: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 206/228

Also, certain personal data can be exposed, such as:

● The user's first and last name

● The user's email address

● The user's thumbnail image or avatar

The scope of this personal information depends on the context of the gadget, specifically:

● Content gadgets: can expose data on all members of the group to which they have been added.

● Profile gadgets: can expose data on all members that the user who has added the gadget is following.

Please consider the security implications of this data exposure for any OpenSocial gadget that you add to SAP

Jam.

To add an OpenSocial gadget, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select OpenSocial Gadgets from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin OpenSocial Gadgets  section is displayed.

Figure 159: OpenSocial Gadgets catalog

206 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 207: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 207/228

This page presents a catalog of previously configured OpenSocial gadgets, with UI controls that allow you to

Enable/Disable, View, Edit, or Delete existing OpenSocial gadgets, to add a new OpenSocial Gadget ( Add

Gadget), or to import the configuration for an OpenSocial Gadget ( Import Gadget Configuration).

2. To add an OpenSocial Gadget, click Add Gadget at the upper right corner of the page.The Register OpenSocial Gadget page is displayed.

Figure 160: Register OpenSocial Gadget form

1. In the URL field, enter the URL of the OpenSocial gadget that you want to register.

2. Optionally, select the Enabled checkbox to have the gadget immediately available.

The gadget can be enabled at any time, whether from the  Admin OpenSocial Gadgets  catalog or

the Edit Edit OpenSocial Gadget  page.

3. From the Context drop-down menu, select either:

○ Content to have the gadget appear as an addable option in the Content area of SAP Jam groups.

○ Profile to have the gadget appear in the Admin > Custom Profile [page 76] page, where you canconfigure where it will appear in your users' profile pages.

4. Optionally, to configure access to the data stores for personalized data for the gadget, you can enter a list

of parameters in the Search Paths field.

These parameters allow you to descend into the AppData pool and the public_wave pool JSON data

structures. Search parameters can be space- or comma-delimited, and wildcards can be set on the JSON

keys. For example:

○ a — This example searches for all data within a keys.

○ a.b — This example searches for all data within b keys that are within a keys.

○ a.b* — This example uses * as a wildcard to search for all data within keys that start with b (using the

* wildcard) that are within a keys.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 207

Page 208: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 208/228

○ a.b* c.d — This example uses a space delimiter to provide two search paths. The first search path

(a.b*) searches for all data within keys that start with b that are within a keys. The second search

path searches for all data within c keys that are within d keys.

○ a.b*,c.d — This example uses a comma delimiter rather the space delimiter used in the previousexample; otherwise, it peforms the same searches as the previous example.

5. Optionally, to enable access to the gadget and its displayed data using OAuth 1.0a, click Add Service

Configuration in the OAuth 1.0a Service Configurations section.

An Add Service Configuration dialog box will be displayed. Do the following:

1. In the Service Name text box, enter the service name for your OAuth 1.0a service.

2. In the Consumer Key text box, enter the consumer key for your OAuth 1.0a service.

3. In the Consumer Secret text box, enter the consumer secret for your OAuth 1.0a service.

4. From the Signature Method drop-down menu, select the consumer secret for your OAuth 1.0a

service.

5. Click OK to save these options, or click Cancel to abandon them.

You are returned to the  Admin OpenSocial Gadgets  catalog.

Figure 161: OAuth Add Service Configuration dialog boxes

6. Optionally, to enable access to the gadget and its displayed data using OAuth 2.0, click Add Service

Configuration in the OAuth 2.0 Service Configurations section.An Add Service Configuration dialog box will be displayed. Do the following:

1. In the Service Name text box, enter the service name for your OAuth 2.0 service.

2. In the Client Id text box, enter the client ID for your OAuth 2.0 service.

3. In the Client Secret text box, enter the consumer secret for your OAuth 2.0 service.

4. Click OK to save these options, or click Cancel to abandon them.

You are returned to the  Admin OpenSocial Gadgets  catalog.

7. From the Choose Display Language drop-down menu, select the language that you want displayed in the

OpenSocial gadget.

8. At any time after you have entered the URL for the gadget, you can click Refresh beside Gadget

Information to view important information about the gadget and to see a preview of the gadget.

208 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 209: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 209/228

Figure 162: OpenSocial Gadget information and preview

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 209

Page 210: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 210/228

9. When all of the above settings are complete, click Save to register the OpenSocial gadget for use in SAP

Jam.

You are returned to the OpenSocial Gadgets page, with the gadget that you registered listed in the

catalog.3. Alternatively, you can upload a gadget configuration file, from the  Admin OpenSocial Gadgets  catalog.

Gadget configurations are the files that you get when you click on Export Gadget Configuration in a gadget's

administration page. To do this, do the following:

1. Click Import Gadget Configuration near the top of the page.

Your browser will open a file upload dialog box.

2. Navigate to the configuration file and upload it.

After importing the file, the Register OpenSocial Gadget page is displayed with the file's configuration

information displayed in the various text boxes of the form.

3. Change any of the existing settings, or fill in any missing settings, and click Save.

You are returned to the OpenSocial Gadgets page, with the gadget that you registered listed in the

catalog.

4. In the  Admin OpenSocial Gadgets  catalog, click View on the row for the OpenSocial gadget to view the

information about that gadget.

An OpenSocial Gadget: <gadget_name> page is displayed.

You can either modify the information by clicking Edit or return to the OpenSocial Gadgets page by clicking

Back.

5. In the  Admin OpenSocial Gadgets  catalog, click Edit on the row for the OpenSocial gadget to edit that

gadget's configuration.

The Edit OpenSocial Gadget page is displayed, which is effectively identical to the Register OpenSocial Gadget

page, although you cannot modify the Context once it is set.

1. Make whatever changes are required.

2. Click Save to save your changes.

You are returned to the OpenSocial Gadgets page, with the modified OpenSocial Gadget that you just

edited listed in the catalog.

4.6 Integrate SAP Jam with gamification vendors

Gamification makes it easy to help guide and reward new hires and existing employees to rapidly integrate SAP

Jam into their work processes. SAP Jam provides event hooks that make integration with leading gamification

vendors very straightforward. User activity in SAP Jam (including activity interacting with events sent from other

applications) can trigger information being sent to the gamification vendor, where it can be analyzed against

established goals or challenges. Based on the criteria of these established challenges, SAP Jam users can be

rewarded with 'badges' that cumulatively go towards completing 'missions' that exemplify the behavior that is

required for employees to be most effective in their jobs. A variety of actions in SAP Jam can be identified as the

criteria for earning badges and completing missions.

Note

Currently, the only gamification vendor that SAP Jam integrates with is Bunchball.

210 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 211: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 211/228

Table 25: SAP Jam available gamification actions

Actions Metadata Actions Metadata

added_discussion group edited_document group, document

added_idea group edited_page group

annotated_document group, document external_member_accepted_my_invite

answered_forum_question group, discussion followed_member

answered_question_correctly group, discussion followed_you

asked_forum_question group gave_endorsement

blogged group gave_kudo

chatted invited_external_member

commented_on_document group, discussion invited_member_to_group group

created_document group, document joined_group group

created_expertise posted_group_wall_comment group

crm_updated_accounts external posted_member_wall_comment

crm_updated_campaigns external received_endorsement

crm_updated_knowledge_articles external received_kudo

crm_updated_marketing_plans external updated_member_status

crm_updated_opportunities external viewed_blog * group, blog_entry

crm_updated_sales_orders external viewed_document * group, document

crm_updated_service_orders external viewed_your_blog * group, blog_entry

crm_updated_service_requests external viewed_your_document * group, document

crm_updated_tasks external voted_for_idea group, discussion

Note

* No action is sent if the person viewing the content is also the creator of that content. This is done to prevent

inappropriately high counts on these items.

To enable gamification integration with your SAP Jam service, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Features from the left navigation sidebar.The  Admin Features  section is displayed.

2. Near the bottom of the page, select the Enable Gamification checkbox and click Save changes.

3. In your gamification vendor's Administration page, define the challenges that you want to be supported in

SAP Jam.

For example, when a member joins a group, a joined_group action is sent to the vendor along with metadata

representing the group identifier. When setting the rules for a challenge, that metadata can be matched.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 211

Page 212: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 212/228

Figure 163: Using gamification metadata

4. From the SAP Jam Admin sidebar menu, select Gamification.

The  Admin Gamification  page is displayed.

Figure 164: Gamification configuration

5. In the Gamification page, enter the parameters provided by your gamification vendor.

These include:

○ Bunchball Hostname

○ Bunchball Key

○ Bunchball Secret

212 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 213: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 213/228

Note

The Magic Number is automatically generated when the Gamification configuration is initially saved.

6. Select Gamification Types that you want to enable.

○ Enable In-context Gamification Notifications—Select this option to enable Gamification Notifications.

○ Enable Badges and Missions—Select this option to enable badges and missions.

○ Enable Leaderboard—Select this option to enable the Leaderboard.

7. Select the Gamification Feed Options that you want to enable.

These options refer to the data that is returned from Bunchball about the gamification data.

○ Enable Display Challenge Name in Feed—Enable this option to have the name of the challange included in

the feed from Bunchball.

○ Enable Display Challenge Description in Feed—Enable this option to have the description of the challange

included in the feed from Bunchball.

○ Enable Display Challenge Custom Data in Feed—Enable this option to have the custom data for thechallange included in the feed from Bunchball.

8. Click Save to enable your gamification settings.

4.7 Add Extensions

The SAP Jam Admin console provides access to the extensions available for SAP Jam from the SAP HANA App

Center. To access these extensions, do the following:1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Extensions Catalog from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Extensions Catalog  page is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 213

Page 214: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 214/228

Figure 165: The Extensions Catalog page

2. Click on Learn More beside any extension that is of interest to view the SAP HANA App Center page for that

extension.

Details on the extension are shown in that page, as well as acquisition information and installation

instructions, or information on how to access such instructions.

Note

Extensions from the SAP HANA App Center are not currently available in translation. Please ensure that you

and your users are prepared to use the extension in its available language, or languages, prior to acquiring and

installing one.

214 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 215: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 215/228

4.8 Use the Widget Builders

The SAP Jam Admin console provides a tool for building three common types of widgets, which are complex

HTML5 components that use a preset structure to present some common types of SAP Jam content. The Widget

Builder page currently provides the following widget builders:

● The Feed Widget Builder—Creates a highly customizable feed widget that can be used to embed one of five

different types of SAP Jam feed in an external web page.

● The Recommendation Widget Builder—Creates a customizable recommendation widget that can be used to

embed SAP Jam content, people, or groups recommendations in an external web page.

● The Share Widget Builder—Creates a share widget that can be embedded in any external web page to add a

"share link" (like other social network share buttons), and which will post the containing page to either SAP

Jam group or member feeds when clicked in the external web page.

4.8.1 Use the Feed Widget Builder

The Feed Widget Builder provides the easy creation of a highly customizable feed widget that can display any of

five different types of SAP Jam feed in an HTML page, with no requirement for knowing the JavaScript in which

they are written.

To create a feed widget with your specifications, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Widget Builders from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Widget Builders  section is displayed.

2. Click the Feed Widget Builder tab.

The Feed Widget Builder tab content is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 215

Page 216: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 216/228

Figure 166: The Feed Widget Builder

3. In the Widget div ID field, enter a unique and meaningful name for the HTML div tag that will encapsulate your

feed widget.

This div ID is used in the widget JavaScript that you generate using this form, and it must match the div ID in

the HTML page that you use as the container for this widget. Accept the default ID of myDiv unless there are

other divs in the same page with the same ID, as the div ID must be unique within the page in which you add

the widget.

4. From the Authentication Type drop-down menu, select the type of authentication that you want to use.

216 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 217: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 217/228

Page 218: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 218/228

The feed will behave differently depending on whether the logged-in user is able to view the full feed

history for that particular external object type:

○ Default behavior: If feed history is not enabled, or the user is not authorized to view the full feed

history for the object, they only see the feed updates that are explicitly routed to them, such as via adistribution list.

○ Feed History: To enable feed history for an external object, a company administrator must configure

the necessary authentication settings and external object types in the External Applications tab of the

Jam Admin page. From this page, administrators can enable the feed history for specific external

object types. Once feed history is enabled, any time a user views an external object feed, the Feed

Widget calls back to the external application to determine whether the user has permission to view

that object. If authorization succeeds, the Feed Widget displays the entire feed history for the

external object. If authorization fails, the widget reverts back to the default behavior described above.

For more on External Objects, see Integrate business records [page 116].

○ External Wall Feed: will create the JavaScript code to display a SAP Jam feed in an external web site. If you

select this option, the following fields display:○ External ID: This can be any string that you want to use to uniquely identify the topic.

○ Name: This should be a user-friendly name for the topic. This is the name that will show up in the feed

when you comment on the topic, which will appear in the form "John Doe commented on <name>".

○ External URL: [Optional] This can be any fully-qualified external URL. If this property is provided, then

the topic name will be rendered in the feed as a link that opens this URL in a new tab when a user

clicks on it.

○ Mentions Feed: will display a feed of messages in which the user was mentioned. This will include all

@@notify mentions. This will be the same as the feed that is displayed when a user clicks on the

"@<user_name>" option on their home page.

○ Content Item Feed: will display a feed of comments made on the selected content item identified in this

configuration. This will be the same as viewing the messages posted in that content item's page. If youselect this option, the following fields display:

○ Content type: Select the appropriate content type from the drop-down menu.

○ Content item ID: This must be the unique ID as set by SAP Jam for the content item for which you

want the feed widget to show all comments. This will be the same as the ID segment of the URL for

the page that displays the content item.

6. From the Style drop-down menu, select the styling that you want to apply to your widget.

The options are:

○ Jam

○ SAP Cloud for Customer

7. Set the following check box toggles as desired:

○ Show Profile Photos in Feed: shows thumbnails of the creators of each post in the feed.

○ Show User Profile Photo: shows a thumbnail of the requesting user at that top of the feed.

○ Live Feed Updates: sets whether updates are automatic or by notification message.

○ Mobile Mode: presents only mobile-capable features in the feed.

○ Filter by the Following Hash Tags: allows you to set some filtering on the feed based on the hashtags

entered in the text box below this toggle.

8. From the Post Mode drop-down menu, select the option that you want for users' posts.

The "Post Mode" refers to the text entry box at the top of the feed in which you can post a comment. The

options for this are:

○ Inline: A text entry box is displayed at the top of the Feed Widget.

○Link to Jam: A link to the SAP Jam feed is displayed at the top of the Feed Widget.

218 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 219: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 219/228

○ Hidden: There is no option for posting displayed at the top of the Feed Widget.

9. From the Reply Mode drop-down menu, select the option that you want for users' replies.

The "Reply Mode" refers to the options to reply to other peoples' comments. The options are:

○ Inline: A control, labeled "Reply" is displayed below a user's comment, which opens a Reply text box ifclicked.

○ Link to Jam: A link to the SAP Jam feed is displayed below a user's comment.

○ Hidden: There is no option for replying displayed below a user's comment.

10. Set the following checkbox toggles as desired:

○ Hide Like Links: this toggle shows or hides users' likes as a post in the feed as replies.

○ Hide Bookmark Links: this toggle shows or hides users' bookmarks in the feed as replies.

○ Limit feed items to a maximum of : allows you to set the maximum number of feed items.

11. At any point in configuring your feed widget, you can click Preview to see both a rendered example of the

current settings and an example of the script that is set by the current options.

12. When you are satisfied with the configuration of your widget, copy the JavaScript from the bottom text box of

the Preview area and paste it into your web page within script tags. Ensure that you click Preview immediately

before you copy the script to be certain that your most recently selected options are reflected in the script.

Also, ensure that you have the div with the ID from step 4 in your HTML page, which calls the script and

displays the widget within that div.

The result should look something like the following example:

<html> 

<head>  <title>SAP Jam Div-Based Widget</title>  </head>  <body> 

<script type="text/javascript" src="https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/assets/feed_widget_v1.js"></script>

  <script type="text/javascript">sapjam.feedWidget.init(  "https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/widget/v1/feed",  "single_use_token");

var w = sapjam.feedWidget.create("myDiv", {  type: "follows",

avatar: false,post_mode: "inline",

  reply_mode: "inline"  single_use_token: '883a5486-62af-407a-a5ca-cec6dcf259dc'  });</script> 

</body> </html>

13. Add a div tag above the JavaScript that you pasted into the HTML body in the previous step. This div tag must:

○ Be placed before the JavaScript, or you must use something like the jQuery .ready() function, so that

the order of script elements in the page does not matter.

○ Use the same "id" as you set or accepted in the Widget div ID field of the Widgets Builder form.

○ Include style statements that set the width and height of the widget, otherwise it will inherit the

dimensions of its container element.

The result should look something like this:

<html> 

<head>  <title>SAP Jam Div-Based Widget</title>  </head>  <body> 

<div id="myDiv" style="width:100%; height:100%"></div> 

<script type="text/javascript" src="https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/assets/

feed_widget_v1.js"></script>

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 219

Page 220: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 220/228

  <script type="text/javascript">sapjam.feedWidget.init(  "https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/widget/v1/feed",  "single_use_token");  var w = sapjam.feedWidget.create("myDiv", {

  type: "follows",avatar: false,post_mode: "inline",reply_mode: "inline"

  single_use_token: '883a5486-62af-407a-a5ca-cec6dcf259dc'  });</script>  </body> </html>

4.8.2 Use the Recommendations Widget Builder

The Recommendations Widget Builder provides the easy creation of a customizable recommendations widgetsfor SAP Jam content, people, or groups recommendations that can be placed into any HTML page, with no

requirement for knowing the JavaScript in which they are written.

To create a recommendations widget with your specifications, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Widget Builders from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Widget Builders  section is displayed.

2. Click the Recommendations Widget Builder tab.

The Recommendations Widget Builder tab content is displayed.

Figure 167: The Recommendations Widget Builder

3. In the Widget div ID field, enter a unique and meaningful name for the HTML div tag that will encapsulate your

recommendations widget.

220 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 221: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 221/228

This div ID is used in the widget JavaScript that you generate using this form, and it must match the div ID in

the HTML page that you use as the container for this widget. Accept the default ID of myDiv unless there are

other divs in the same page with the same ID, as the div ID must be unique within the page in which you add

the widget.4. From the Authentication Type drop-down menu, select the type of authentication that you want to use.

The options are:

○ SuccessFactors Identity Provider: uses an existing SAP Jam session, or an existing SuccessFactors

session, or it presents a SuccessFactors sign-on page and then redirects to the requested

recommendations widget after the user signs in. [Recommended]

○ Pre-existing Jam session: uses an existing SAP Jam session, or it displays an error message if one is not

found. [Not recommended: included for legacy support]

○  Jam session with Sign In: uses an existing SAP Jam session, or it presents a SAP Jam sign-on page and

then redirects to the requested recommendations widget after the user signs in. [Not recommended:

included for legacy support]

○  Jam session with Sign In pop-up: uses an existing SAP Jam session, or it presents a SAP Jam sign-on pagein a new page or tab, and—upon successful sign-on—the new page closes, and the original requesting

page redirects to the requested recommendations widget. [Not recommended: included for legacy

support]

○ Single-use Token: uses a single-use token provided by the Jam API. [Recommended]

For further information generating a single-use token, see the Auth API section of the SAP Jam API

Documentation, particularly the documentation of [POST] /v1/single_use_tokens.

After obtaining a single-use token, it needs to be included in the parameters passed into the

sapjam.recommendationsWidget.create function call in the widget initialization script. For example:

sapjam.recommendationsWidget.init( 

"https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/widget/v1/recommendation",

  "single_use_token");var w = sapjam.recommendationsWidget.create("myDiv",{  style: "link",  type: "people",  max: "5", 

single_use_token: '883a5486-62af-407a-a5ca-cec6dcf259dc' });

5. From the Type drop-down menu, select the layout of the recommendations that you want to use.

The options are:

○ Grid

○ List

6. From the # of Recommendations drop-down menu, select the number of recommendations that you want

displayed.The options are:

○ 3

○ 5

○ 10

7. From the Recommendation Type options, select the radio button for the type of recommendations that you

want to display.

The options are:

○ Content

○ People

○ Groups

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 221

Page 222: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 222/228

8. At any point in configuring your feed widget, you can click Preview to see both a rendered example of the

current settings and an example of the script that is set by the current options.

9. When you are satisfied with the configuration of your widget, copy the JavaScript from the bottom text box of

the Preview area and paste it into your web page within script tags. Ensure that you click Preview immediatelybefore you copy the script to be certain that your most recently selected options are reflected in the script.

Also, ensure that you have the div with the ID from step 4 in your HTML page, which calls the script and

displays the widget within that div.

The result should look something like the following example:

<html> 

<head>  <title>SAP Jam Div-Based Widget</title>  </head>  <body> 

<script type="text/javascript" src="https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/assets/recommendation_widget_v1.js">  </script>  <script type="text/javascript">sapjam.recommendationsWidget.init(  "https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/widget/v1/recommendation",  "single_use_token");

var w = sapjam.recommendationsWidget.create("myDiv", {  style: "link",  type: "people",  max: "5",  single_use_token: '883a5486-62af-407a-a5ca-cec6dcf259dc'  });</script> 

</body> </html>

10. Add a div tag above the JavaScript that you pasted into the HTML body in the previous step. This div tag must:

○ Be placed before the JavaScript, or you must use something like the jQuery .ready() function, so that

the order of script elements in the page does not matter.○ Use the same "id" as you set or accepted in the Widget div ID field of the Widgets Builder form.

○ Include style statements that set the width and height of the widget, otherwise it will inherit the

dimensions of its container element.

The result should look something like this:

<html> 

<head>  <title>SAP Jam Div-Based Widget</title>  </head>  <body> 

<div id="myDiv" style="width:100%; height:100%"></div> 

<script type="text/javascript" src="https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/assets/recommendation_widget_v1.js">  </script>  <script type="text/javascript">sapjam.recommendationsWidget.init(  "https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/widget/v1/recommendation",  "single_use_token");

var w = sapjam.recommendationsWidget.create("myDiv", {  style: "link",  type: "people",  max: "5",  single_use_token: '883a5486-62af-407a-a5ca-cec6dcf259dc'  });</script>  </body> </html>

222 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 223: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 223/228

4.8.3 Use the Share Widget Builder

The Share Widget Builder creates a share widget that can be embedded in any external web page to add a "share

link" (like other social network share buttons) that will post an entry about the containing page to either SAP Jam

member or group feeds. Creating the share widget has no requirement for knowing how to write JavaScript code.

To create a share widget with your specifications, do the following:

1. Access the Admin console [page 11] and select Widget Builders from the left navigation sidebar.

The  Admin Widget Builders  page is displayed.

2. Click the Share Widget Builder tab.

The Share Widget Builder tab content is displayed.

Figure 168: The Share Widget Builder

3. In the Widget element ID field, enter a unique and meaningful name for the HTML div tag that will encapsulate

your Share widget.

This div ID is used in the widget JavaScript that you generate using this form, and it must match the div ID in

the HTML page that you use as the container for this widget. Accept the default ID of myDiv unless there are

other divs in the same page with the same ID, as the div ID must be unique within the page in which you add

the widget.

4. Select the Create default widget button to have a widget button included in the embedded widget.

Note

If you deselect this option, you must add the text or icon to be displayed in the div tag from which the

widget is displayed.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 223

Page 224: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 224/228

5. In the Page URL text box, enter the URL of the external web page in which the widget it embedded. It is the

initial content of this page that will be displayed in the SAP Jam feed.

6. Optionally, in the Group ID (optional) text box, enter the ID for the group in which you want the external page

to have an entry added to that group's feed (group wall).You can get this ID from the last segment of the group's URL. For example, in the group URL, https://

<jam#>.sapjam.com/groups/about_page/6jAzl7p5W9gtIyEv6O7TAQ, you would use

"6jAzl7p5W9gtIyEv6O7TAQ".

Note

If you leave this field blank, the widget will add the shares to your company's members' walls.

7. To include your company logo in the shared content, select the Use custom branding option. This is the logo

configured in your SAP Jam's  Admin Branding and Support options .

8. At any point in configuring your share widget, you can click Preview to see both a rendered example of the

current settings and an example of the script that is set by the current options.

9. When you are satisfied with the configuration of your widget, copy the JavaScript from the bottom text box of

the Preview area and paste it into your web page. Your script should look something like this:

<html> 

<head>  <title>SAP Jam Div-Based Widget</title>  </head>  <body> 

<script type="text/javascript" src="https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/assets/share_widget_v1.js"></script>  <script type="text/javascript">var w = sap.jam.shareWidget.create(  "https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/c/sfcubetree01.com/widget/v1/share",  "myDiv", {

  url: "http://www.example.com/some-page.html",create_button: true,branding: true

  });</script> </body>

 </html>

Also, ensure that you have the div with the ID from step 3 in your HTML page, and that you call the script from

within that div. For example, you could paste the following into the body of an external web page:

<html> 

<head>  <title>Some Page</title>  </head>

  <body>  <div id="myDiv" style="width:100%; height:100%"></div> 

<script type="text/javascript" src="https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/assets/share_widget_v1.js" ></script>  <script type="text/javascript">var w = sap.jam.shareWidget.create(  "https://<jam#>.sapjam.com/c/sfcubetree01.com/widget/v1/share",  "myDiv",  {  url: "http://www.example.com/some-page.html",  create_button: true,

branding: true  });</script>  </body> </html>

224 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations

Page 225: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 225/228

4.9 Use the SAP Jam API

SAP Jam provides APIs that allow you to integrate SAP Jam features into your business critical applications, and

data from your business critical applications into SAP Jam. The majority of these API calls are OData APIs. There

are a very few of old REST API calls that have not yet been migrated to OData, but these will soon be migrated to

OData API calls. New features will only be developed in the OData API.

The SAP Jam API is available to all Enterprise customers (see SAP Jam editions in About SAP Jam [page 5]).

Sites of interest are:

● SAP Jam API Documentation: The full SAP Jam API Reference and related documentation.

● SAP Jam Developer Community : The online support community of and for SAP Jam developers.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Integrations © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 225

Page 226: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 226/228

5 Get support

5.1 Request Support

To file a SAP Jam Support request, please see: https://csauthfs.successfactors.com/adfs/ls/ .

This is the same portal used to request support for all SuccessFactors modules, including SAP Jam.

SAP Jam adheres to the same Service Level Agreements and Case Priorities as all SuccessFactors modules. The

case priorities for SAP Jam product defects are:

● P1 — No Users Can Access the SAP Jam Instance

● P2 — Some users Cannot Access the SAP Jam Instance

● P3 — Product Defect / Integration Request

● P4 — How-To Question

226 © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Get support

Page 227: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 227/228

Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

Coding Samples

Any software coding and/or code lines / strings ("Code") included in this doc umentation are only examples and are not intended to be used in a productive system

environment. The Code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax and phrasing rules of certain coding. SAP does not warrant the correctness and

completeness of the Code given herein, and SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the usage of the Code, unless damages were caused by SAP

intentionally or by SAP's gross negligence.

Accessibility

The information contained in the SAP documentation represents SAP's current view of accessibility criteria as of the date of publication; it is in no way intended to be a

binding guideline on how to ensure accessibility of software products. SAP in particular disclaims any liability in relation to this document. This disclaimer, however, does

not apply in cases of wilful misconduct or gross negligence of SAP. Furthermore, this document does not result in any direct or indirect contractual obligations of SAP.

Gender-Neutral Language

As far as possible, SAP documentation is gender neutral. Depending on the context, the reader is addressed directly with "you", or a gender-neutral noun (such as "sales

person" or "working days") is used. If when referring to members of both sexes, however, the third-person singular cannot be avoided or a gender-neutral noun does not

exist, SAP reserves the right to use the masculine form of the noun and pronoun. This is to ensure that the documentation remains comprehensible.

Internet Hyperlinks

The SAP documentation may contain hyperlinks to the Internet. These hyperlinks are intended to serve as a hint about where to find related information. SAP does not

warrant the availability and correctness of this related information or the ability of this information to serve a particular purpose. SAP shall not be liable for any damages

caused by the use of related information unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct. All links are categorized for transparency

(see: http://help.sap.com/disclaimer).

SAP Jam Administrator Guide

Important Disclaimers and Legal Information © 2015 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. 227

Page 228: SAP Jam Administrator Guide

7/21/2019 SAP Jam Administrator Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/sap-jam-administrator-guide 228/228

www.sap.com/contactsap